forked from qt-creator/qt-creator
		
	
		
			
				
	
	
		
			10401 lines
		
	
	
		
			371 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			Plaintext
		
	
	
	
	
	
			
		
		
	
	
			10401 lines
		
	
	
		
			371 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			Plaintext
		
	
	
	
	
	
| /****************************************************************************
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** This file is part of Qt Creator
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** Copyright (c) 2011 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** No Commercial Usage
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
 | |
| ** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
 | |
| ** contained in the Technology Preview License Agreement accompanying
 | |
| ** this package.
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** GNU Free Documentation License
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Free
 | |
| ** Documentation License version 1.3 as published by the Free Software
 | |
| ** Foundation and appearing in the file included in the packaging of this
 | |
| ** file.
 | |
| **
 | |
| ** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact
 | |
| ** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com.
 | |
| **
 | |
| ****************************************************************************/
 | |
| 
 | |
| // **********************************************************************
 | |
| // NOTE: the sections are not ordered by their logical order to avoid
 | |
| // reshuffling the file each time the index order changes (i.e., often).
 | |
| // Run the fixnavi.pl script to adjust the links to the index order.
 | |
| // **********************************************************************
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage{index.html}{Qt Creator}
 | |
|     \page index.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-overview.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Qt Creator Manual
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Version \qtcversion
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides a cross-platform, complete integrated development
 | |
|     environment (IDE) for application developers to create applications for
 | |
|     multiple desktop and mobile device platforms. It is available for Linux,
 | |
|     Mac OS X and Windows operating systems. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Please report bugs and suggestions to the
 | |
|     \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com}{Qt Bug Tracker}.
 | |
|     You can also join the Qt Creator mailing list. To subscribe,
 | |
|     send a message with the word \e subscribe to
 | |
|     \l{mailto:qt-creator-request@qt.nokia.com}
 | |
|     {qt-creator-request@trolltech.com}. For more information about Qt mailing
 | |
|     lists, visit \l{http://lists.qt.nokia.com}{http://lists.qt.nokia.com}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \raw HTML
 | |
|     <img border="0" style="float:right;" src="images/qtcreator-screenshots.png" />
 | |
|     \endraw
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o \l{Introducing Qt Creator}
 | |
|        \o \l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}
 | |
|        \o \l{Qt Creator User Interface}
 | |
|        \o \l{Getting Started}
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o \l{Building and Running an Example Application}
 | |
|                \o \l{Creating a Qt Widget Based Application}
 | |
|                \o \l{Creating a Mobile Application with Qt SDK}
 | |
|                \o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Managing Projects}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Creating a Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Opening a Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up a qmake Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Adding Libraries to qmake Projects}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Managing Sessions}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Using the Editor}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Finding and Replacing}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Refactoring}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Using Qt Quick Toolbars}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Searching With the Locator}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Configuring the Editor}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Using FakeVim Mode}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Using an External Editor}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Developing Application UI}
 | |
|        \list
 | |
|            \o \l{Developing Qt Quick Applications}
 | |
|                 \list
 | |
|                     \o \l {Creating Qt Quick Projects}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Using Qt Quick Designer}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Creating Components}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Creating Buttons}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Creating Screens}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Animating Screens}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Adding User Interaction Methods}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Exporting Designs from Graphics Software}
 | |
|                     \o \l {Implementing Application Logic}
 | |
|                 \endlist
 | |
|            \o \l{Developing Widget Based Applications}
 | |
|                \list
 | |
|                    \o \l{Adding Qt Designer Plugins}
 | |
|                \endlist
 | |
|            \o \l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}
 | |
|        \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Building and Running Applications}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Building Applications for Multiple Targets}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Running Applications on Multiple Targets}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Build Settings}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Run Settings}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Dependencies}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Debugging}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Debugging the Example Application}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Interacting with the Debugger}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up Debugger}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Debugger Modes of Operation}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Using Debugging Helpers}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Debugging Qt Quick Projects}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}
 | |
|        \o \l{Deploying Applications to Mobile Devices}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Publishing Applications to Ovi Store}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Building with Remote Compiler}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Using Version Control Systems}
 | |
|        \o \l{Creating Task List Files}
 | |
|        \o \l{Using Command Line Options}
 | |
|        \o \l{Getting Help}
 | |
|        \o \l{Tips and Tricks}
 | |
|        \o \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}
 | |
|        \o \l{Known Issues}
 | |
|        \o \l{Glossary}
 | |
|        \o \l{Acknowledgements}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage index.html
 | |
|     \page creator-overview.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \title Introducing Qt Creator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator is an integrated development environment (IDE) that provides you with
 | |
|     tools to design and develop applications with the Qt application framework. Qt is designed for
 | |
|     developing applications and user interfaces once and deploying them across several
 | |
|     desktop and mobile operating systems. Qt Creator provides you with tools for
 | |
|     accomplishing your tasks throughout the whole application development life-cycle,
 | |
|     from creating a project to deploying the application on the target platforms.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-overview.png "Qt Creator overview"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Cross-platform Development
 | |
| 
 | |
|     One of the major advantages of Qt Creator is that it allows a team of developers
 | |
|     to share a project across different development platforms with a common tool
 | |
|     for development and debugging.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The recommended way to build a project is to use a version control system.
 | |
|     Store and edit only project source files and the .pro and .pri files (for qmake)
 | |
|     or CMakeLists.txt and *.cmake files (for CMake). Do not store
 | |
|     files generated by the build system or Qt Creator, such as makefiles,
 | |
|     .pro.user, and object files. Other approaches are possible,
 | |
|     but we recommend that you do not use network resources, for example.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to specify separate build settings
 | |
|     for each development platform. By default, \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds} are used to
 | |
|     keep the build specific files separate from the source.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can create separate versions of project files to keep platform-dependent
 | |
|     code separate. You can use qmake
 | |
|     \l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.7/qmake-tutorial.html#adding-platform-specific-source-files}{scopes}
 | |
|     to select the file to process depending on which platform qmake is run on.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Items such as open files, breakpoints, and watchers are stored in
 | |
|     sessions. They are not considered to be part of the
 | |
|     information shared across platforms.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     But why do you need projects? To be able to build and run applications,
 | |
|     Qt Creator needs the same information as a compiler would need. This information
 | |
|     is specified in the project build and run settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Creating a project allows you to:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Group files together
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Add custom build steps
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Include forms and resource files
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Specify settings for running applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Setting up a new project in Qt Creator is aided by a wizard that guides
 | |
|     you step-by-step through the project creation process. In the first step, you
 | |
|     select the type of the project from the categories: Qt Quick project, Qt widget
 | |
|     project, or other project. Next, you select a location for the project and
 | |
|     specify settings for it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-new-qt-quick-project-wizard.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you have completed the steps, Qt Creator automatically generates the
 | |
|     project with required headers, source files, user interface descriptions
 | |
|     and project files, as defined by the wizard.
 | |
|     For example, if you choose to create a Qt Quick application, Qt Creator
 | |
|     generates a QML file that you can modify with the integrated \QMLD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Adding Libraries
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition to Qt libraries, you can link your application to other
 | |
|     libraries, such as system libraries or your own libraries. Further, your
 | |
|     own libraries might link to other libraries. To be able to compile your
 | |
|     project, you must add the libraries to your project. This also enables
 | |
|     code completion and syntax highlighting for the libraries.
 | |
|     The procedure of adding a library to a project depends on the build
 | |
|     system that you use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Version Control Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator uses the version control system's command line clients to access
 | |
|     your repositories. The following version control systems are supported:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Git
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Subversion
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Perforce
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o CVS
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Mercurial
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The functions available to you in Qt Creator depend on the version control
 | |
|     system. Basic functions are available for all the supported systems. They include
 | |
|     comparing files with the latest versions stored in the repository and displaying the
 | |
|     differences, viewing versioning history and change details, annotating files,
 | |
|     and committing and reverting changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Designing User Interfaces
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides two integrated visual editors, \QMLD and \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-ui-designers.png "Qt Quick Designer and Qt Designer"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Large high-resolution screens, touch input, and significant graphics power
 | |
|     are becoming common in portable consumer devices, such as mobile
 | |
|     phones, media players, set-top boxes, and netbooks. To fully benefit from
 | |
|     these features and to create intuitive, modern-looking, fluid user interfaces,
 | |
|     you can use \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtquick.html}{Qt Quick}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Quick consists of a rich set of user interface elements, a declarative
 | |
|     language for describing user interfaces, and a language runtime. A
 | |
|     collection of C++ APIs is used to integrate these high level features with
 | |
|     classic Qt applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can edit QML code in the code editor or in the integrated \QMLD.
 | |
|     The integration includes project management and code completion.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you need a traditional user interface that is clearly structured and
 | |
|     enforces a platform look and feel, you can use the integrated \QD. You can
 | |
|     compose and customize your widgets or dialogs and test them using different
 | |
|     styles and resolutions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Coding
 | |
| 
 | |
|     As an IDE, Qt Creator differs from a text editor in that it knows how to build and run
 | |
|     applications. It understands the C++ and QML languages as code, not just as plain text. This allows
 | |
|     it to:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Enable you to write well formatted code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Anticipate what you are going to write and complete the code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Display inline error and warning messages
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Enable you to semantically navigate to classes, functions, and symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Provide you with context-sensitive help on classes, functions, and symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Rename symbols in an intelligent way, so that other symbols with the same name
 | |
|          that belong to other scopes are not renamed
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Show you the locations in code where a function is declared or called
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the code editor to write code in Qt C++ or in the
 | |
|     QML declarative programming language.
 | |
|     QML is an extension to JavaScript, that provides a mechanism to declaratively build
 | |
|     an object tree of QML elements. QML improves the integration between JavaScript and
 | |
|     Qt's existing QObject based type system, adds support for automatic property bindings
 | |
|     and provides network transparency at the language level.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator is integrated with cross-platform systems for build automation:
 | |
|     qmake and CMake. In addition, you can import generic projects that do not use qmake
 | |
|     or CMake, and specify that Qt Creator ignores your build system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides support for building and running Qt applications for
 | |
|     desktop environment (Windows, Linux, and Mac OS) and mobile devices (Symbian and Maemo).
 | |
|     Build settings allow you to quickly switch between build targets.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you install the \QSDK, the build and run settings for the Maemo and Symbian
 | |
|     targets are set up automatically. However, you need to install and configure some
 | |
|     additional software on the devices to be able to connect to them from the
 | |
|     development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The only supported build system for mobile applications in Qt
 | |
|     Creator is qmake.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Testing
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you install Qt Creator as part of \QSDK, the GNU Symbolic Debugger
 | |
|     is installed automatically and you should be ready to start debugging after
 | |
|     you create a new project. However, you can change the setup to use debugging
 | |
|     tools for Windows, for example.
 | |
|     You can connect mobile devices to your development PC and debug processes
 | |
|     running on the devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can test applications that are intended for mobile devices in the Qt
 | |
|     Simulator and Maemo Emulator, but you also need to test the applications
 | |
|     on real devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Debuggers
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator is integrated to several external native debuggers:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o GNU Symbolic Debugger (gdb)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o internal JavaScript debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of your
 | |
|     application while debugging. You can interact with the debugger in several
 | |
|     ways, including the following:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Go through a program line-by-line or instruction-by-instruction.
 | |
|         \o Interrupt running programs.
 | |
|         \o Set breakpoints.
 | |
|         \o Examine the contents of the call stack.
 | |
|         \o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
 | |
|            the debugged program.
 | |
|         \o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
 | |
|            local and global variables.
 | |
|         \o Examine the list of loaded shared libraries.
 | |
|         \o Create snapshots of the current state of the debugged program
 | |
|            and re-examine them later.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator displays the raw information provided by the native debuggers
 | |
|     in a clear and concise manner with the goal to simplify the debugging process
 | |
|     as much as possible without losing the power of the native debuggers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition to the generic IDE functionality provided by stack view, views for
 | |
|     locals and watchers, registers, and so on, Qt Creator includes
 | |
|     features to make debugging Qt-based applications easy. The debugger
 | |
|     plugin understands the internal layout of several Qt classes, for
 | |
|     example, QString, the Qt containers, and most importantly QObject
 | |
|     (and classes derived from it), as well as most containers of the C++
 | |
|     Standard Library and some gcc and Symbian extensions. This
 | |
|     deeper understanding is used to present objects of such classes in
 | |
|     a useful way.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 QML Script Console
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of
 | |
|     the application while debugging JavaScript functions. You can set breakpoints,
 | |
|     view call stack trace, and examine locals and watchers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the application is interrupted by a breakpoint, you can use the \gui {QML
 | |
|     Script Console} to execute JavaScript expressions in the current context. You can
 | |
|     type JavaScript expressions and use them to get information about the state of the
 | |
|     application, such as property values.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you change property values or add properties in the code editor, the
 | |
|     changes are updated in the running application when they are saved.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 QML Observer
 | |
| 
 | |
|     While the application is running, you can use the \gui {QML Observer} view to
 | |
|     explore the object structure, debug animations, and inspect colors. When debugging
 | |
|     complex applications, you can use the observe mode to jump to the position in code
 | |
|     where an element is defined.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Qt Simulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Simulator to test Qt applications that are intended
 | |
|     for mobile devices in an environment similar to that of the device. You
 | |
|     can change the information that the device has about its configuration
 | |
|     and environment.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Qt Simulator is installed as part of the \QSDK. After it is
 | |
|     installed, you can select it as a build target in Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Maemo Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo 5 emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
 | |
|     applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
 | |
|     on a Nokia N900 device with the software update release 1.3 (V20.2010.36-2).
 | |
|     However, it is faster to test on a real device connected to the development
 | |
|     PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo Emulator is installed as part of the \QSDK. After it is
 | |
|     installed, you can start it from Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Deploying
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator deploy configurations handle the packaging of the application as an
 | |
|     executable and copying it to a location developers want to run the executable at.
 | |
|     The files can be copied to a location in the file system of the development PC
 | |
|     or to a mobile device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to create installation packages for Symbian and Maemo
 | |
|     devices that are suitable for publishing on Ovi Store and other channels.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-overview.html
 | |
|     \page creator-os-supported-platforms.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-quick-tour.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Operating Systems and Supported Platforms
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Operating Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator is available in binary packages for the following operating
 | |
|     systems:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Windows 7
 | |
|         \o Windows XP Service Pack 2
 | |
|         \o Windows Vista
 | |
|         \o (K)Ubuntu Linux 8.04 (32-bit and 64-bit) or later, with the following:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o g++
 | |
|                \o make
 | |
|                \o libglib2.0-dev
 | |
|                \o libSM-dev
 | |
|                \o libxrender-dev
 | |
|                \o libfontconfig1-dev
 | |
|                \o libxext-dev
 | |
|                \o libfreetype6-dev
 | |
|                \o libx11-dev
 | |
|                \o libxcursor-dev
 | |
|                \o libxfixes-dev
 | |
|                \o libxft-dev
 | |
|                \o libxi-dev
 | |
|                \o libxrandr-dev
 | |
|                \o If you are using QtOpenGL, libgl-dev and libglu-dev
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|         \o Mac OS 10.5 or later with the following:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o Xcode tools for your Mac OS X version available from your Mac
 | |
|                   OS X installation DVDs or at \l http://developer.apple.com.
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \omit  ## Are the Xcode tools still needed separately? \endomit
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Compiling Qt Creator from Source
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To build Qt Creator itself from the source, see the requirements and
 | |
|     instructions in the readme file that is located in the source repository.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Supported Platforms
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can develop applications for the following platforms:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Desktop
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Qt Simulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Maemo 5
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Symbian
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes operating system support for developing
 | |
|     applications for mobile device platforms.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o {1,4} Operating system
 | |
|             \o {4,1} Platform
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Desktop
 | |
|             \o Qt Simulator
 | |
|             \o Maemo
 | |
|             \o Symbian
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Windows
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Linux
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes (by using Remote Compiler for building)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Mac OS X
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes (by using Remote Compiler for building)
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
 | |
|     \page creator-quick-tour.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-getting-started.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Qt Creator User Interface
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-breakdown.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you start Qt Creator, it opens to the \gui Welcome mode, where you can:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Open tutorials and example projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o View tips and hints on using Qt Creator
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Create and open projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Send feedback to the development team
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Open recent sessions and projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Read news from the Qt labs
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Ask for support
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the mode selector to change to another Qt Creator mode.
 | |
|     The following image displays an example application in \gui Edit mode
 | |
|     and \gui Design mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-qt-quick-editors.png "Edit mode and Design mode"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator has been localized into several languages. If the system language
 | |
|     is one of the supported languages, it is automatically selected. To change
 | |
|     the language, select \gui {Tools > Options > Environment} and select a language
 | |
|     in the \gui Language field. The change takes effect after you restart Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Qt Creator Modes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The mode selector allows you to quickly switch between tasks such as
 | |
|     editing project and source files, designing application UIs,
 | |
|     configuring how projects are built and
 | |
|     executed, and debugging your applications. To change modes, click the
 | |
|     icons, or use the \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{corresponding keyboard shortcut}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use Qt Creator in the following modes:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Using the Editor}{Edit}} mode for editing project and source files.
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Developing Application UI}{Design}} mode for designing and developing
 | |
|            application user interfaces. This mode is available for UI files (.ui or
 | |
|            .qml).
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Debugging}{Debug}} mode for inspecting the state of your program while
 | |
|            debugging.
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Specifying Build Settings}{Projects}} mode for configuring project building and
 | |
|            execution. This mode is available when a project is open.
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Getting Help}{Help}} mode for viewing Qt documentation.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Certain actions in Qt Creator trigger a mode change. Clicking on
 | |
|     \gui {Debug} > \gui {Start Debugging} > \gui {Start Debugging}
 | |
|     automatically switches to \gui {Debug} mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Browsing Project Contents
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The sidebar is available in the \gui Edit and \gui Debug modes.
 | |
|     Use the sidebar to browse projects, files, and bookmarks, and to view
 | |
|     the class hierarchy.
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-sidebar.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select the content of the sidebar in the sidebar menu:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui Projects shows a list of projects open in the current
 | |
|            session.
 | |
|         \o \gui{Open Documents} shows currently open files.
 | |
|         \o \gui Bookmarks shows all bookmarks for the current session.
 | |
|         \o \gui{File System} shows all files in the currently selected
 | |
|             directory.
 | |
|         \o \gui {Class View} shows the class hierarchy of the currently
 | |
|             open projects.
 | |
|         \o \gui Outline shows the symbol hierachy of a C++ file and the element hierarchy of a QML file.
 | |
|         \o \gui {Type Hierarchy} shows the base classes of a class. For
 | |
|             more information, see \l{Viewing Type Hierarchy}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can change the view of the sidebar in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To toggle the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
 | |
|            or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
 | |
|         \o To split the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-splitbar.png
 | |
|            . Select new content to view in the split view.
 | |
|         \o To close a sidebar view, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-closesidebar.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The additional options in each view are described in the following
 | |
|     sections.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Project Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The sidebar displays projects in a project tree. The project tree contains
 | |
|     a list of all projects open in the current session. The files for each
 | |
|     project are grouped according to their file type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the project tree in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To bring up a context menu containing the actions most commonly
 | |
|            needed right-click an item in the project tree.
 | |
|            For example, through the menu of the project root directory you can,
 | |
|            among other actions, build, re-build, clean and run the project.
 | |
|         \o To hide the categories and sort project files alphabetically, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
 | |
|            and select \gui{Simplify Tree}.
 | |
|         \o To hide source files which are automatically generated by the build
 | |
|            system, during a build, click \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
 | |
|            and select \gui{Hide Generated Files}.
 | |
|         \o To keep the position in the project tree synchronized with the file
 | |
|            currently opened in the editor, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To see the absolute path of a file, move the mouse pointer over the
 | |
|            file name.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing the File System
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you cannot see a file in the \gui Projects view, switch to the
 | |
|     \gui {File System} view, which shows all the files in the file system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To keep the position in the tree synchronized with the file
 | |
|     opened in the editor, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
 | |
|     .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing the Class Hierarchy
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Class View} shows the class hierarchy of the currently
 | |
|     open projects. To organize the view by subprojects, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-show-subprojects.png
 | |
|     .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing QML Elements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Outline view shows the element hierarchy in a QML file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To see a complete list of all bindings, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
 | |
|            and select \gui{Show All Bindings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To keep the position in the view synchronized with the element
 | |
|            selected in the editor, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The task pane in Qt Creator can display one of the following panes:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Build Issues}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Search Results}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Application Output}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Compile Output}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{General Messages}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Version Control}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Output panes are available in all \l{Qt Creator modes}{modes}.
 | |
|     Click the name of an output pane to open the pane. To maximize
 | |
|     an open output pane, click the \gui {Maximize Output Pane} button
 | |
|     or press \key {Alt+9}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To search within the \gui{Application Output} and \gui{Compile Output}
 | |
|     panes, press \key {Ctrl+F} when the pane is active. Enter search
 | |
|     criteria in the \gui Find field and click the left and right arrows to
 | |
|     search down and up in the pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open the \gui{General Messages} and \gui{Version Control}
 | |
|     panes, select \gui {Window > Output Panes}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Build Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Build Issues} pane provides a list of errors and warnings
 | |
|     encountered during a build. The pane filters out irrelevant output from
 | |
|     the build tools and presents the issues in an organized way.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Right-clicking on a line brings up a context menu with options to copy
 | |
|     the contents and to show a version control annotation view of the
 | |
|     line that causes the error message.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-issues.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To view task lists in the \gui{Build Issues} pane, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
 | |
|     and select \gui{My Tasks}. Entries from a task list file (.tasks) are
 | |
|     imported to the pane. Press \key F6 and \key Shift+F6 to jump from one issue
 | |
|     to the next.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about creating task files, see \l{Creating Task List Files}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Search Results
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Search Results} pane displays the results for global searches,
 | |
|     for example, searching within a current document, files on disk, or all
 | |
|     projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The figure below shows an example search result for all
 | |
|     occurrences of \c textfinder within the \c "/TextFinder" directory.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-search-pane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Application Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Application Output} pane displays the status of a program when
 | |
|     it is executed, and the debug output.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The figure below shows an example output from qDebug().
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-application-output.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compile Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Compile Output} pane provides all output from the compiler.
 | |
|     The \gui{Compile Output} is a more detailed version of information
 | |
|     displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-compile-pane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Navigating with Keyboard
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator caters not only to developers who are used to using the mouse,
 | |
|     but also to developers who are more comfortable with the keyboard. A wide
 | |
|     range of \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{keyboard} and
 | |
|     \l{Searching With the Locator}{navigation} shortcuts are available to help
 | |
|     speed up the process of developing your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-cli.html
 | |
|     \page creator-help.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-tips.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Getting Help
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator comes fully integrated with Qt documentation and
 | |
|     examples using the Qt Help plugin.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To view documentation, switch to \gui Help mode.
 | |
|         \o To obtain context sensitive help, move the text cursor to a Qt class
 | |
|            or function and press \key F1. The documentation is displayed in a
 | |
|            pane next to the code editor, or, if there is not enough vertical
 | |
|            space, in the fullscreen \gui Help mode.
 | |
|         \o To select and configure how the documentation is displayed in the
 | |
|            \gui Help mode, select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Help.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following image displays the \gui Search pane in the \gui Help mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-help-search.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following image displays the context sensitive help in the \gui Edit
 | |
|     mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-context-sensitive-help.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Finding Information in Qt Documentation
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator, \QSDK and other Qt deliverables contain documentation
 | |
|     as .qch files. All the documentation is accessible in the \gui Help mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To find information in the documentation, select:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui Bookmarks to view a list of pages on which you have added bookmarks.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui Contents to see all the documentation installed on the development
 | |
|         PC and to browse the documentation contents.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui Index to find information based on a list of keywords in all the
 | |
|         installed documents.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Open Pages} to view a list of currently open documentation pages.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui Search to search from all the installed documents.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Adding Bookmarks to Help Pages
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add bookmarks to useful help pages to easily find them later
 | |
|     in the \gui Bookmarks view. You can either use the page title as the
 | |
|     bookmark or change it to any text. You can organize the bookmarks in
 | |
|     folders in the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-help-add-bookmark-dlg.png "Add Bookmark dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a bookmark to an open help page:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the
 | |
|         \inlineimage qtcreator-help-add-bookmark.png
 | |
|         (\gui {Add Bookmark}) button on the toolbar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Add Bookmark} dialog, click \gui OK to save the
 | |
|         page title as a bookmark in the \gui Bookmarks folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To import and export bookmarks, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help >
 | |
|     General Settings > Import} or \gui Export.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding External Documentation
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can display external documentation in the \gui Help mode.
 | |
|     To augment or replace the documentation that ships with Qt Creator and Qt:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Create a .qch file from your documentation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            For information on how to prepare your documentation and create a
 | |
|            .qch file, see
 | |
|            \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qthelp-framework.html}{The Qt Help Framework}.
 | |
|         \o To add the .qch file to Qt Creator, select \gui Tools >
 | |
|            \gui Options... > \gui Help > \gui Documentation > \gui Add.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Detaching the Help Window
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, context-sensitive help is opened in a window next to the
 | |
|     code editor when you press \key F1. If there is not enough vertical
 | |
|     space, the help opens in the full-screen help mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify that the help always opens in full-screen mode or
 | |
|     is detached to an external window. Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help >
 | |
|     General Settings} and specify settings for displaying context-sensitive help
 | |
|     in the \gui {On context help} field. To detach the help window, select
 | |
|     \gui {Always Show Help in External Window}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select the help page to open upon startup in the \gui {Home Page}
 | |
|     field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Documentation Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can filter the documents displayed in the \gui Help mode to find
 | |
|     relevant information faster. Select from a list of filters in the
 | |
|     \gui {Filtered by} field. The contents of the \gui Index and \gui Contents
 | |
|     pane in the sidebar change accordingly.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-help-filters.png "Help filters"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can modify the filters to include external documentation, for example,
 | |
|     or you can define your own filters. To construct filters, you can use the
 | |
|     filter attributes that are specified in the documentation. Each document
 | |
|     contains at least one filter attribute. If several documents contain the
 | |
|     same filter attribute, such as \c tools, you can use that attribute to
 | |
|     include all those documents.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add filters:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help > Filters > Add}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Enter a name for the filter and press \gui {OK}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In \gui Attributes, select the documents that you want to include
 | |
|         in the filter.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-help-filter-attributes.png "Help filter attributes"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Help mode, select the filter in the \gui {Filtered by}
 | |
|         field to see the filtered documentation in the sidebar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To modify filters, select a filter in \gui Filters, select the attributes,
 | |
|     and then click \gui Apply.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove filters, select them in \gui Filters, and click \gui Remove.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-external.html
 | |
|     \page creator-design-mode.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-visual-editor.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Developing Application UI
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Large high-resolution screens, touch input, and significant graphics power
 | |
|     are becoming common in portable consumer devices, such as mobile
 | |
|     phones, media players, set-top boxes, and netbooks. To fully benefit from
 | |
|     these features and to create intuitive, modern-looking, fluid user interfaces,
 | |
|     you can use \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtquick.html}{Qt Quick}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Quick consists of a rich set of user interface elements, a declarative
 | |
|     language for describing user interfaces, and a language runtime. A
 | |
|     collection of C++ APIs is used to integrate these high level features with
 | |
|     classic Qt applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can edit QML code in the code editor or in the integrated \QMLD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-design-mode.png "Design mode"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The integration includes project management and code completion.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you need a traditional user interface that is clearly structured and
 | |
|     enforces a platform look and feel, you can use the integrated \QD. You can
 | |
|     compose and customize your widgets or dialogs and test them using different
 | |
|     styles and resolutions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following sections describe how to develop application UI:
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \o \l{Developing Qt Quick Applications}
 | |
|            \o \l{Developing Widget Based Applications}
 | |
|            \o \l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-application-logic.html
 | |
|     \page creator-using-qt-designer.html
 | |
|     \nextpage adding-plugins.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Developing Widget Based Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Widgets and forms created with \QD are integrated seamlessly with programmed code,
 | |
|     using the Qt signals and slots mechanism, that lets you easily assign behavior to
 | |
|     graphical elements. All properties set in \QD can be changed dynamically within the code.
 | |
|     Furthermore, features like widget promotion and custom plugins allow you to use your
 | |
|     own widgets with \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically opens all .ui files in \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-formedit.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To change the layout of \QD user interface elements:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} > \gui Views >
 | |
|            \gui Locked.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            When this option is unchecked, you can change the layout.
 | |
|         \o Click the header of an element and drag the element to a new
 | |
|            position.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To change \QD properties, select \gui Tools > \gui Options... >
 | |
|     \gui Designer.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Set the class properties and code generation preferences in \gui
 | |
|            {Class Generation}.
 | |
|         \o Set an additional folder for saving templates in \gui{Template
 | |
|            Paths}.
 | |
|         \o Set the grid settings and preview preferences in \gui Forms. To
 | |
|            preview your form with skins, enable \gui{Print/Preview
 | |
|            Configuration} and select your skin. Otherwise default preview
 | |
|            settings are used.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            To preview the settings, select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} >
 | |
|            \gui Preview, or press \key Alt+Shift+R.
 | |
|         \o To specify embedded device profiles, such as style, font, and screen
 | |
|            resolution, select \gui{Embedded Design}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To switch between forms and code, use \key Shift+F4.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on \QD, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-projects.html
 | |
|     \page creator-using-qt-quick-designer.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-components.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using Qt Quick Designer
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can edit .qml files in the \QMLD visual editor or in the
 | |
|     code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In \gui Projects, double-click a .qml file to open it in the code
 | |
|     editor. Then select the \gui {Design} mode to edit the file in the
 | |
|     visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-visual-editor.png "Visual editor"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the visual editor panes to manage your project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {Navigator} pane displays the QML elements in the current QML file
 | |
|     as tree structure.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {Library} pane displays the building blocks that you can use to design
 | |
|     applications: predefined QML elements, your own QML components, and other
 | |
|     resources.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {Properties} pane organizes the properties of the selected QML element
 | |
|     or QML component. You can also change the properties in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {State} pane displays the different states of the component. QML
 | |
|     states typically describe user interface configurations, such as the UI
 | |
|     elements, their properties and behavior and the available actions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Managing Element Hierarchy
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Navigator pane displays the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativeelements.html}{QML elements}
 | |
|     in the current QML file and their relationships.
 | |
|     Elements are listed in a tree structure, below their parent.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-navigator.png "Navigator pane"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select elements in the \gui Navigator to edit their properties
 | |
|     in the \gui Properties pane. Elements can access the properties of their
 | |
|     parent element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Typically, child elements are located within the parent element on the
 | |
|     canvas. However, they do not necessarily have to fit inside the parent element.
 | |
|     For example, you might want to make a mouse area larger than the rectangle
 | |
|     or image beneath it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-element-size.png "Mouse area for a button"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you copy an element, all its child elements are also copied. When
 | |
|     you remove an element, the child elements are also removed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can show and hide items to focus on specific parts of the application.
 | |
|     Click the
 | |
|     \inlineimage qmldesigner-show-hide-icon.png
 | |
|     icon to change the visibility of an element on the canvas. To change the
 | |
|     visibility of an element in the application, use the \gui Visibility
 | |
|     check box or the \gui Opacity field in the \gui Properties pane. If you set
 | |
|     \gui Opacity to 0, elements are hidden, but you can still apply animation
 | |
|     to them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     As all properties, visibility and opacity are inherited from the parent
 | |
|     element. To hide or show child elements, edit the properties of the
 | |
|     parent element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To view lists of files or projects, instead, select \gui {File System},
 | |
|     \gui {Open Documents}, or \gui Projects in the menu.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Switching Parent Elements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you drag and drop QML elements to the canvas, Qt Quick Designer
 | |
|     adds the new element as a child of the element beneath it.
 | |
|     When you move elements on the canvas, Qt Quick Designer cannot determine
 | |
|     whether you want to adjust their position or attach them to a new
 | |
|     parent element. Therefore, the parent element is not automatically
 | |
|     changed. To change the parent of the element, press down the \key Shift
 | |
|     key before you drag and drop the element into a new position. The topmost
 | |
|     element under the cursor becomes the new parent of the element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can change the parent of an element also in the \gui Navigator pane.
 | |
|     Drag and drop the element to another position in the tree.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Element Library
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Library} pane contains two tabs: \gui {Items} and \gui {Resources}.
 | |
|     The \gui Items pane displays the QML elements grouped by type: your own QML
 | |
|     components, basic elements, interaction elements, views, and widgets.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-qml-components.png "QML Components pane"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Resources} pane displays the images and other files that you copy to
 | |
|     the project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Element Properties
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Properties pane displays all the properties of the selected QML element.
 | |
|     The properties are grouped by type. The top part of the pane displays properties
 | |
|     that are common to all elements, such as element type, position, size,
 | |
|     and visibility.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The bottom part of the pane displays properties that are specific to each element
 | |
|     type. For example, the following image displays the properties you can set for
 | |
|     \gui Rectangle and \gui Text elements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-element-properties.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The default values of properties are displayed in white color, while the values
 | |
|     that you specify explicitly are highlighted with blue color. In addition, property
 | |
|     changes in states are highlighted with blue.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on the properties available for an element, press \key {F1}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Setting Expressions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/propertybinding.html}{Property binding}
 | |
|     is a declarative way of specifying the value of a property.
 | |
|     Binding allows a property value to be expressed as an JavaScript expression
 | |
|     that defines the value relative to other property values or data accessible
 | |
|     in the application. The property value is automatically kept up to date if
 | |
|     the other properties or data values change.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Property bindings are created implicitly in QML whenever a property is assigned
 | |
|     an JavaScript expression. To set JavaScript expressions as values of properties
 | |
|     in Qt Quick Designer, click the circle
 | |
|     icon next to a property to open a context menu, and select \gui {Set Expression}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-set-expression.png "Element properties context menu"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove expressions, select \gui Reset in the context menu.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on the JavaScript environment provided by QML, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativejavascript.html}{Integrating JavaScript}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Setting Anchors and Margins
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition to arranging elements in a grid, row, or column, you can use
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-anchor-layout.html}{anchors} to lay out screens.
 | |
|     In an anchor-based layout, each item can be thought of as having a set of
 | |
|     invisible \e anchor lines: top, bottom, left, right, fill, horizontal center,
 | |
|     vertical center, and baseline.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui Layout pane you can set anchors and margins for elements. To set
 | |
|     the anchors of an item, click the anchor buttons. You can combine the top/bottom,
 | |
|     left/right, and horizontal/vertical anchors to anchor objects in the corners of
 | |
|     the parent element or center them horizontally or vertically within the parent
 | |
|     element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-anchor-buttons.png "Anchor buttons"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In version 2.1, specifying the baseline anchor in Qt Quick Designer is
 | |
|     not supported. You can specify it using the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For performance reasons, you can only anchor an element to its siblings and
 | |
|     direct parent. By default, an element is anchored to its parent when you
 | |
|     use the anchor buttons. Select a sibling of the element in the \gui Target
 | |
|     field to anchor to it, instead.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Arbitrary anchoring is not supported. For example, you cannot specify:
 | |
|     \c {anchor.left: parent.right}. You have to specify: \c {anchor.left: parent.left}.
 | |
|     When you use the anchor buttons, anchors to the parent element are always
 | |
|     specified to the same side. However, anchors to sibling elements are specified
 | |
|     to the opposite side: \c {anchor.left: sibling.right}. This allows you to keep
 | |
|     sibling elements together.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the following image, \gui{Rectangle 2} is anchored to its siblings on its
 | |
|     right and left and to the bottom of its parent.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-anchors.png "Anchoring sibling elements"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The anchors for \gui{Rectangle 2} are specified as follows in code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \qml
 | |
|     Rectangle {
 | |
|         id: rectangle2
 | |
|         anchors.right: rectangle3.left
 | |
|         anchors.rightMargin: 15
 | |
|         anchors.left: rectangle1.right
 | |
|         anchors.leftMargin: 15
 | |
|         anchors.bottom: parent.bottom
 | |
|         anchors.bottomMargin: 15
 | |
|         // ...
 | |
|     }
 | |
|     \endqml
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Margins specify the amount of empty space to leave to the outside of an item.
 | |
|     Margins only have meaning for anchors. They do not take any effect when using
 | |
|     other layouts or absolute positioning.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Building Transformations on Items
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Advanced pane allows you configure advanced transformations, such as
 | |
|     rotation, scale, and translation. You can assign any number of transformations
 | |
|     to an item. Each transformation is applied in order, one at a time.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on Transform elements, see
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-transform.html}{QML Transform Element}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding States
 | |
| 
 | |
|     User interfaces are designed to present different interface configurations
 | |
|     in different scenarios, or to modify their appearances in response to user
 | |
|     interaction. Often, there are a set of changes that are made concurrently,
 | |
|     such that the interface could be seen to be internally changing from one
 | |
|     \e state to another.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This applies generally to interface elements regardless of their complexity.
 | |
|     A photo viewer may initially present images in a grid, and when an image is
 | |
|     clicked, change to a detailed state where the individual image is expanded
 | |
|     and the interface is changed to present new options for image editing.
 | |
|     On the other end of the scale, when a simple button is pressed, it may change
 | |
|     to a \e pressed state in which its color and position is modified to give a
 | |
|     pressed appearance.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In QML, any object can change between different states to apply sets of changes
 | |
|     that modify the properties of relevant items. Each state can present a
 | |
|     different configuration that can, for example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Show some UI elements and hide others.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Present different available actions to the user.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Start, stop or pause animations.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Execute some script required in the new state.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Change a property value for a particular item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Show a different view or screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui State pane displays the different
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativestates.html}{states}
 | |
|     of the component in the Qt Quick Designer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-transitions.png "State pane"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add states, click the empty slot. Then modify the new state in the editor.
 | |
|     For example, to change the appearance of a button, you can hide the button
 | |
|     image and show another image in its place. Or, to add movement to the screen,
 | |
|     you can change the position of an object on the canvas and then add animation
 | |
|     to the change between the states.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can preview the states in the \gui State pane and click them to switch
 | |
|     between states on the canvas.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on using states, see \l{Creating Screens}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you add animation to the states, you can run the application to test the
 | |
|     animation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on adding animation, see \l{Animating Screens}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Aligning and Positioning Elements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The position of an element on the canvas can be either absolute or relative
 | |
|     to other elements. In the element properties, you can set the x and y
 | |
|     coordinates of an element, or \l{Setting Anchors and Margins}{anchor} it to its
 | |
|     parent and sibling elements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Snap to Margins
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you are working on a design, you can use snap and guides to align
 | |
|     elements on the canvas. Click the
 | |
|     \inlineimage qmldesigner-snap-to-guides-button.png
 | |
|     button to have the elements snap to the guides.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Choose \gui {Tools > Options... > Qt Quick} to specify settings for snap to
 | |
|     margins. In the \gui {Snap margin} field, specify the position of the guides
 | |
|     as pixels  from the edge of the canvas. In the \gui {Item spacing} field,
 | |
|     specify the space in pixels to leave between elements on the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following image shows the position of the guides when \gui {Snap margin}
 | |
|     is set to 5 pixels.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-snap-margins.png "Snap margins on canvas"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Hiding Element Boundaries
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Quick Designer displays the boundaries of elements on the canvas. To hide
 | |
|     the element boundaries, click the
 | |
|     \inlineimage qmldesigner-show-bounding-rectangles-button.png
 | |
|     button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Selecting Elements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you point the mouse to overlapping elements, the frontmost element is
 | |
|     selected by default. However, elements that do not have any content, such as
 | |
|     the mouse area, are typically located in front of elements that do have
 | |
|     content, such as rectangles or border images. To select elements with content
 | |
|     by default, click the
 | |
|     \inlineimage qmldesigner-only-select-items-with-content.png
 | |
|     button.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-wizards.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-using.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-finding.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using the Editor
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator's code editor is designed to aid you in creating, editing and
 | |
|     navigating code.  Qt Creator's code editor is fully equipped with syntax
 | |
|     checking, code completion, context sensitive help and in-line error
 | |
|     indicators while you are typing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-edit-mode.png "Edit mode"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using the Editor Toolbar
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The editor toolbar is located at the top of the editor view. The editor
 | |
|     toolbar is context sensitive and shows items relevant to the file currently
 | |
|     open in the editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-editortoolbar-symbols.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the toolbar to navigate between open files and symbols in use.
 | |
|     To browse forward or backward through your location history, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
 | |
|            and \inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To go to any open file, select it from the \gui{Open files} drop-down menu.
 | |
|     Right-click the menu title and select \gui {Copy Full Path to Clipboard} to
 | |
|     copy the path and name of the current file to the clipboard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To jump to any symbol used in the current file, select it from the
 | |
|     \gui Symbols drop-down menu. By default, the symbols are displayed in the
 | |
|     order in which they appear in the file. Right-click the menu title and select
 | |
|     \gui {Sort Alphabetically} to arrange the symbols in alphabetic order.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Splitting the Editor View
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Split the editor view when you want to work on and view multiple files on
 | |
|     the same screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-spliteditorview.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can split the editor view in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To split the editor view into a top and bottom view, select
 | |
|            \gui Window > \gui Split or press \key{Ctrl+E, 2}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Split command creates views below the currently active editor view.
 | |
|         \o To split the editor view into adjacent views, select
 | |
|            \gui Window > \gui{Split Side by Side} or press
 | |
|            \key{Ctrl+E, 3}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Side by side split command creates views to the right of the
 | |
|            currently active editor view.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To move between split views, select \gui Window >
 | |
|     \gui{Go to Next Split} or press \key{Ctrl+E, O}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove a split view, place the cursor within the view you want to
 | |
|     remove and select \gui Window > \gui{Remove Current Split} or press
 | |
|     \key{Ctrl+E, 0}. To remove all but the currently selected split view,
 | |
|     select \gui Window > \gui{Remove All Splits} or press \key{Ctrl+E, 1}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Semantic Highlighting
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator understands the C++ and QML languages as code, not as plain text.
 | |
|     It reads the source code, analyzes it, and highlights it based on the
 | |
|     semantic checks that it does for the following code elements:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Types (such as classes, structs, and type definitions)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Local variables
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Class fields
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Virtual methods
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To specify the color scheme to use for semantic highlighting, select
 | |
|     \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Fonts & Color}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator supports syntax highlighting also for other types of files than
 | |
|     C++ or QML. For more information, see \l{Generic Highlighting}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Highlighting and Folding Blocks
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use block highlighting to visually separate parts of the code that belong
 | |
|     together. For example, when you place the cursor within the braces,
 | |
|     the code enclosed in braces is highlighted.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-blockhighlighting.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable block highlighting, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Highlight blocks}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the folding markers to collapse and expand blocks of code within
 | |
|     braces. Click the folding marker to collapse or expand a block. In the
 | |
|     figure above, the folding markers are located between the line number and
 | |
|     the text pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To show the folding markers, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Display folding markers}. This
 | |
|     option is enabled by default.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the cursor is on a brace, the matching brace is animated
 | |
|     by default. To turn off the animation and just highlight the block and
 | |
|     the braces, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Display} and
 | |
|     deselect \gui {Animate matching parentheses}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Checking Code Syntax
 | |
| 
 | |
|     As you write code Qt Creator checks code syntax. When Qt Creator spots a
 | |
|     syntax error in your code it underlines it and shows error details when you
 | |
|     move the mouse pointer over the error.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Syntax errors are underlined in red.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            In the following figure, a semicolon is missing at the end of the
 | |
|            line.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-syntaxerror.png
 | |
|         \o Semantic errors and warnings are underlined in olive.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            In the following figure, the type is unknown.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-semanticerror.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Completing Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     As you write code, Qt Creator suggests properties, IDs, and code
 | |
|     snippets to complete the code. It provides a list of context-sensitive
 | |
|     suggestions to the statement currently under your cursor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-codecompletion.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open the list of suggestions at any time, press \key{Ctrl+Space}.
 | |
|     If only one option is available, Qt Creator inserts it automatically.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When completion is invoked manually, Qt Creator completes the common prefix
 | |
|     of the list of suggestions. This is especially useful for classes with
 | |
|     several similarly named members. To disable this functionality, uncheck
 | |
|     \gui{Autocomplete common prefix} in the code completion preferences.
 | |
|     Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Completion.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, code completion considers only the first letter case-sensitive.
 | |
|     To apply full or no case-sensitivity, select the option in the
 | |
|     \gui {Case-sensitivity} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Summary of Available Types
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table lists available types for code completion and icon
 | |
|     used for each.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Icon
 | |
|             \o Description
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/class.png
 | |
|             \i  A class
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/enum.png
 | |
|             \i  An enum
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/enumerator.png
 | |
|             \i  An enumerator (value of an enum)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/func.png
 | |
|             \i  A function
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/func_priv.png
 | |
|             \i  A private function
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/func_prot.png
 | |
|             \i  A protected function
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/var.png
 | |
|             \i  A variable
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/var_priv.png
 | |
|             \i  A private variable
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/var_prot.png
 | |
|             \i  A protected variable
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/signal.png
 | |
|             \i  A signal
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/slot.png
 | |
|             \i  A slot
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/slot_priv.png
 | |
|             \i  A private slot
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/slot_prot.png
 | |
|             \i  A protected slot
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/keyword.png
 | |
|             \i  A C++ keyword
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/snippet.png
 | |
|             \i  A C++ code snippet
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/element.png
 | |
|             \i  A QML element
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/qmlsnippet.png
 | |
|             \i  A QML code snippet
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/macro.png
 | |
|             \i  A macro
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/namespace.png
 | |
|             \i  A namespace
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Completing Code Snippets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Code snippets can consist of multiple
 | |
|     variables that you specify values for. Select an item in the list and press
 | |
|     \key Tab or \key Enter to complete the code. Press \key Tab to
 | |
|     move between the variables and specify values for them. When you specify a
 | |
|     value for a variable, all instances of the variable within the snippet
 | |
|     are renamed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-code-completion.png "Completing QML code"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Editing Code Snippets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Code snippets specify C++ or QML code constructs. You can add, modify,
 | |
|     and remove snippets in the snippet editor. To open the editor, select
 | |
|     \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Snippets}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-edit-code-snippets "Snippet options"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides you with built-in snippets in the following categories:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Text snippets, which can contain any text string. For example, code
 | |
|         comments
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o C++ code snippets, which specify C++ code constructs
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o QML code snippets, which specify QML code constructs
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Adding and Editing Snippets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select a snippet in the list to edit it in the snippet editor. To add a new
 | |
|     snippet, select \gui Add. Specify a trigger and, if the trigger is already
 | |
|     in use, an optional variant, which appear in the list of suggestions when
 | |
|     you write code. Also specify a text string or C++ or QML code construct in
 | |
|     the snippet editor, depending on the snippet category.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The snippet editor provides you with:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Highlighting
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Indentation
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Parentheses matching
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Basic code completion
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Specify the variables for the snippets in the following format:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \c $variable$
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use unique variable names within a snippet, because all instances of a
 | |
|     variable are renamed when you specify a value for it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The snippet editor does not check the syntax of the snippets that you edit
 | |
|     or add. However, when you use the snippets, the code editor marks any
 | |
|     errors by underlining them in red.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To discard the changes you made to a built-in snippet, select \gui {Revert
 | |
|     Built-in}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Removing Snippets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Several similar built-in snippets might be provided for different use
 | |
|     cases. To make the list of suggestions shorter when you write code, remove
 | |
|     the built-in snippets that you do not need. If you need them later, you
 | |
|     can restore them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove snippets, select a snippet in the list, and then select
 | |
|     \gui Remove. To restore the removed snippets, select \gui {Restore Removed
 | |
|     Built-ins}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Resetting Snippets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove all added snippets and to restore all removed snippets, select
 | |
|     \gui {Reset All}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you now select \gui OK or \gui Apply, you permanently lose all
 | |
|     your own snippets.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Bookmarks
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To insert or delete a bookmark right-click the line number and select
 | |
|     \gui{Toggle Bookmark} or press \key{Ctrl+M}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-togglebookmark.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To go to previous bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+,}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To go to next bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+.}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving to Symbol Definition or Declaration
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In Qt Creator you can move directly to the definition or the declaration of
 | |
|     a symbol by holding the \key Ctrl and clicking the symbol.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable this moving function, in \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Behavior, select \gui{Enable mouse navigation}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also select the symbol and press \key F2, or right-click the symbol
 | |
|     and select \gui {Follow Symbol Under Cursor} to move to its definition or declaration.
 | |
|     This is supported for namespaces, classes, methods, variables, include statements,
 | |
|     and macros.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To switch between the definition and declaration of a symbol, press \key {Shift+F2}
 | |
|     or right-click the symbol and select \gui {Switch Between Method Declaration/Definition}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Type Hierarchy
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To view the base classes of a class, right-click the class and select
 | |
|     \gui {Open Type Hierarchy}  or press \key {Ctrl+Shift+T}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Update Code Model
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To refresh the internal information in Qt Creator pertaining to your code,
 | |
|     select \gui{Tools} > \gui{C++} > \gui{Update Code Model}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note In Qt Creator indexing updates the code automatically. Use
 | |
|     \gui{Update Code Model} only as an emergency command.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-locator.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-codepasting.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-options.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In Qt Creator, you can paste snippets of code to a server or fetch
 | |
|     snippets of code from the server. To paste and fetch snippets of code,
 | |
|     Qt Creator uses the following:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui{CodePaster}
 | |
|         \o \gui{Pastebin.Com}
 | |
|         \o \gui{Pastebin.Ca}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To configure the server, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Code Pasting}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To paste a snippet of code onto the server, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+P}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To fetch a snippet of code from the server, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+F}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To use \gui{Pastebin.Com}, configure the domain
 | |
|     prefix in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Code Pasting} >
 | |
|     \gui{Pastebin.com}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, you might ask colleagues to review a change that you plan to
 | |
|     submit to a version control system. If you use the Git version control system,
 | |
|     you can create a \e{diff} view by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} >
 | |
|     \gui{Diff Repository}. You can then upload its contents to the server by choosing
 | |
|     \gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...}. The reviewers can retrieve
 | |
|     the code snippet by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...}.
 | |
|     If they have the project currently opened in Qt Creator, they can apply and test
 | |
|     the change by choosing \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} > \gui{Apply Patch}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-options.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-fakevim.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-external.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using FakeVim Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, you can run the main editor in a manner similar
 | |
|     to the Vim editor. To run the editor in the \gui{FakeVim} mode, select
 | |
|     \gui{Edit} > \gui{Advanced} > \gui{Use Vim-style Editing} or press
 | |
|     \key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, most keystrokes in the main editor will be
 | |
|     intercepted and interpreted in a way that resembles Vim. Documentation for
 | |
|     Vim is not included in Qt Creator. For more information on using Vim,
 | |
|     see \l{http://www.vim.org/docs.php}{Documentation} on the Vim web site.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To map commands entered on the \gui{FakeVim} command line to actions of the
 | |
|     Qt Creator core, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{FakeVim} >
 | |
|     \gui{Ex Command Mapping}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To make changes to the Vim-style settings, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Options...} > \gui FakeVim > \gui{General}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use a Vim-style color scheme, select \gui {Tools > Options... >
 | |
|     Text Editor > Fonts & Color}. In the \gui {Color Scheme} list, select
 | |
|     \gui {Vim (dark)}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To quit the FakeVim mode, click \gui {Quit FakeVim} or press
 | |
|     \key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-fakevim.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-external.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-design-mode.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using an External Editor
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open the file you are currently viewing in an external editor, select
 | |
|     \gui Edit > \gui Advanced > \gui{Open in External Editor}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use the external editor of your choice:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Add the editor path to the \c{PATH} environment variable of your
 | |
|            operating system.
 | |
|         \o In Qt Creator select \gui Tools > \gui Options... >
 | |
|            \gui Environment > \gui General.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{External editor} enter the name of the application followed
 | |
|            by \key Space and \tt{\bold %f}. For example, to open the file in
 | |
|            Smultron, enter \tt{\bold{smultron %f}}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            To further define how to open the file in the external editor, you
 | |
|            can use the following variables separated by a space:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o Current line number \tt{\bold %l}
 | |
|             \o Current column number \tt{\bold %c}
 | |
|             \o Editor's x position on the screen \tt{\bold %x}
 | |
|             \o Editor's y position on the screen \tt{\bold %y}
 | |
|             \o Editor's width in pixels \tt{\bold %w}
 | |
|             \o Editor's height in pixels \tt{\bold %h}
 | |
|             \o Editor's width in characters \tt{\bold %W}
 | |
|             \o Editor's height in characters \tt{\bold %H}
 | |
|             \o To pass % symbol to the editor \tt{\bold %%}
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note Not all variables work with all editors.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-codepasting.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-options.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-fakevim.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Configuring the Editor
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to configure the text editor to suit your specific
 | |
|     needs. To configure the editor, select  \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-font-colors.png "Text editor options"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can perform the following configuration actions:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Set the font preferences and apply color schemes for syntax highlighting in
 | |
|            \gui{Font & Colors}.
 | |
|         \o Specify definition files for syntax highlighting for other types of files than
 | |
|              C++ or QML in \gui{Generic Highlighter}.
 | |
|         \o Set tabs, indentation, the handling of whitespace, and mouse operations in
 | |
|            \gui Behavior.
 | |
|         \o Set various display properties, for example,
 | |
|            \l{Highlighting and folding blocks}{highlighting and folding blocks},
 | |
|            text wrapping or \l{Moving to symbol definition or declaration}
 | |
|            {moving to symbol definition or declaration}
 | |
|            in \gui Display.
 | |
|         \o Configure \l{Completing Code}{code completion} in \gui Completion.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Configuring Fonts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select the font family and size. You can specify a zoom setting in
 | |
|     percentage for viewing the text. You can also zoom in or out by pressing
 | |
|     \key {Ctrl++} or \key {Ctrl +-}, or by pressing \key Ctrl and rolling
 | |
|     the mouse button up or down. To disable the mouse wheel function, select
 | |
|     \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Behavior} and deselect the
 | |
|     \gui {Enable scroll wheel zooming} check box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Antialiasing is used by default to make text look smoother and more
 | |
|     readable on the screen. Deselect the \gui Antialias check box to
 | |
|     turn off antialiasing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Defining Color Schemes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select one of the predefined color schemes for syntax highlighting
 | |
|     or create customized color schemes. The color schemes apply to highlighting
 | |
|     both C++ and QML files and generic files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a color scheme:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Fonts & Color > Copy}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Enter a name for the color scheme and click \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Foreground field, specify the color of the selected
 | |
|         code element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Background field, select the background
 | |
|         color for the code element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The backgound of the \gui Text element determines the background of the
 | |
|         code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you copy code from Qt Creator, it is copied in both plain text and HTML
 | |
|     format. The latter makes sure that syntax highlighting is preserved when
 | |
|     pasting to a rich-text editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Generic Highlighting
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Generic highlighting is based on highlight definition files that are provided by the
 | |
|     \l{http://kate-editor.org/2005/03/24/writing-a-syntax-highlighting-file/}{Kate Editor}.
 | |
|     You can download highlight definition files for use with Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have a Unix installation that comes with the Kate Editor, you might already
 | |
|     have the definition files installed. Typically, the files are in a read-only directory,
 | |
|     and therefore, you cannot manage them. Qt Creator can try to locate them and use them
 | |
|     as fallback files, when the primary location does not contain the definition for the
 | |
|     current file type. You can also specify the directory that contains preinstalled
 | |
|     highlight definition files as the primary location.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you open a file for editing and the editor cannot find the highlight definition
 | |
|     for it, an alert appears. You can turn off the alerts. You can also specify patterns
 | |
|     for ignoring files. The editor will not alert you if highlight definitions for the
 | |
|     ignored files are not found.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To download highlight definition files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Generic Highlighter}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-generic-highlighter.png "Generic Highlighter options"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Location field, specify the path to the primary location for
 | |
|         highlight definition files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui {Download Definitions} to open a list of highlight definition files available for
 | |
|         download.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-manage-definitions.png "Download Definitions dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select highlight definition files in the list and click \gui{Download Selected
 | |
|         Definitions}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui {Use fallback location} check box to specify the secondary location
 | |
|         where the editor will look for highlight definition files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Autodetect to allow Qt Creator to look for highlight definition
 | |
|         files on your system, or click \gui Browse to locate them in the file system
 | |
|         yourself.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Ignored file patterns} field, specify file patterns. You will not
 | |
|         receive alerts if the highlight definitions for the specified files are not found.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui OK to save your changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Indenting Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-indentation.png "Text Editor Behavior options"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you type code, it is indented automatically according to the selected
 | |
|     options. Select a block to indent it when you press \key Tab.
 | |
|     Press \key {Shift+Tab} to decrease the indentation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you press \gui Backspace the indentation is decreased by one level,
 | |
|     instead of one space, by default.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, the tab-length in code editor is 8 spaces, but you can change
 | |
|     it. The code editor can also determine whether tabs or spaces are used
 | |
|     on the previous or next line and copy the style.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can determine whether the block indent style includes braces,
 | |
|     or you can use the GNU indent style. The GNU style places braces on a separate
 | |
|     line, indented by 2 spaces, except when they open a function definition, where
 | |
|     they are not indented.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also specify whether continuation lines are aligned with the previous
 | |
|     code or just indented to the logical depth. You can always use spaces for
 | |
|     alignment or use spaces or tabs depending on the other options you selected.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following code snippet illustrates excluding braces from the indented block:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     void foobar(bool zoo)
 | |
|     {
 | |
|         if (zoo)
 | |
|         {
 | |
|             foo();
 | |
|         }
 | |
|     }
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following code snippet illustrates including braces in the indented block:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     void foobar(bool zoo)
 | |
|     {
 | |
|         if (zoo)
 | |
|             {
 | |
|             foo();
 | |
|             }
 | |
|     }
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following code snippet illustrates the GNU style:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     void foobar(bool zoo)
 | |
|     {
 | |
|       if (zoo)
 | |
|         {
 | |
|           foo();
 | |
|         }
 | |
|     }
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-using.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-finding.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-refactoring.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Finding and Replacing
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To search through the currently open file:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Press \key Ctrl+F or select \gui Edit > \gui Find/Replace >
 | |
|            \gui{Find/Replace}.
 | |
|         \o Enter the text you are looking for.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            If the text is found, all occurrences are highlighted as you type.
 | |
|         \o To go to the next occurrence, click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
 | |
|            , or press \key F3. To go to the previous occurrence click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
 | |
|            , or press \key Shift+F3.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can restrict the search in the \gui Find field by selecting one
 | |
|     or several search criteria:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To make your search case sensitive, select
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-editor-casesensitive.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To search only whole words, select
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-editor-wholewords.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To search using regular expressions, select
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-editor-regularexpressions.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|            Regular expressions used in Qt Creator are modeled on Perl regular
 | |
|            expressions. For more information on using regular expressions, see
 | |
|            \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qregexp.html#details}
 | |
|            {Detailed Description} in the QRegExp Class Reference.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you have selected text before selecting \gui Find/Replace, the
 | |
|     search is conducted within the selection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To replace occurrences of the existing text, enter the new text in the
 | |
|     \gui{Replace with} field.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the next one,
 | |
|            click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
 | |
|            or press \key Ctrl+=.
 | |
|         \o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the previous one,
 | |
|            click \inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To replace all occurrences in the file, click \gui{Replace All}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Advanced Search
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To search through projects, files on a file system or the currently open
 | |
|     file:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Press \key Ctrl+Shift+F or select \gui Edit >
 | |
|            \gui Find/Replace > \gui{Advanced Find} >
 | |
|            \gui{Open Advanced Find...}.
 | |
|         \o Select the scope of your search:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o \gui{All Projects} searches files matching the defined file
 | |
|                pattern in all currently open projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                For example, to search for \tt previewer only in \tt .cpp
 | |
|                and \tt .h files, enter in \gui{File pattern}
 | |
|                \tt *.cpp,*.h.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \image qtcreator-search-allprojects.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \gui{Current Project} searches files matching the defined file
 | |
|                pattern only in the project you are currently editing.
 | |
|             \o \gui{Files on File System} recursively searches files matching
 | |
|                the defined file pattern in the selected directory.
 | |
|             \o \gui{Current File} searches only the current file.
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|         \o Enter the text you are looking for and click \gui Search.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-searchresults.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|            A list of files containing the searched text is displayed in the
 | |
|            \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o To see all occurrences in a file, double-click the file name in
 | |
|                the list.
 | |
|             \o To go to an occurrence, double-click it.
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note You can use \gui{Advanced Find} also to search for symbols. For more
 | |
|     information, see \l{Finding Symbols}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-finding.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-refactoring.html
 | |
|     \nextpage qt-quick-toolbars.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Refactoring
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Code refactoring is the process of changing the code without modifying the
 | |
|     existing functionality of your application. By refactoring your code you
 | |
|     can:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Improve internal quality of your application
 | |
|         \o Improve performance and extensibility
 | |
|         \o Improve code readability and maintainability
 | |
|         \o Simplify code structure
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Finding Symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To find the use of a specific symbol in your Qt C++ or Qt Quick project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In the editor, place the cursor on the symbol, and select:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o \gui {Tools > C++ > Find Usages}
 | |
|             \o \gui {Tools > QML > Find Usages}
 | |
|             \o \key Ctrl+Shift+U
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Qt Creator looks for the symbol in the following locations:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o Files listed as a part of the project
 | |
|             \o Files directly used by the project files (for example, generated
 | |
|                files)
 | |
|             \o Header files of used frameworks and libraries
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note You can also select \gui{Edit > Find/Replace > Advanced Find >
 | |
|         C++ Symbols} to search for classes, methods, enums, and declarations
 | |
|         either from files listed as part of the project or from all files that
 | |
|         are used by the code, such as include files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-search-cpp-symbols.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
 | |
|            number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-refactoring-find.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can browse the search results in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To go directly to an instance, double-click the instance in the
 | |
|            \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|         \o To move between instances, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
 | |
|            and
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
 | |
|            in the \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|         \o To expand and collapse the list of all instances, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-expand.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To clear the search results, click \inlineimage qtcreator-clear.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Renaming Symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The functions available for renaming symbols depend on whether you are
 | |
|     writing C++ or QML code. For QML, you can only rename IDs.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To rename a specific symbol in a Qt project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In the editor, place the cursor on the symbol you would like to
 | |
|            change and select \gui Tools > \gui C++ >
 | |
|            \gui{Rename Symbol Under Cursor} or press \key Ctrl+Shift+R.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
 | |
|            number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-refactoring-replace.png
 | |
|         \o To replace all selected instances, enter the name of the new symbol
 | |
|            in the \gui{Replace with} text box and click \gui Replace.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            To omit an instance, uncheck the check-box next to the instance.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note This action replaces all selected instances of the symbol in
 | |
|            all files listed in the \gui{Search Results} pane. You cannot
 | |
|            undo this action.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Renaming local symbols does not open the \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|     The instances of the symbol are highlighted in code and you can edit the
 | |
|     symbol. All instances of the local symbol are changed as you type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To rename an ID in a Qt Quick project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Right-click an ID in the QML code and select
 | |
|         \gui {Rename id}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Rename id} field, enter the new ID.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Applying Refactoring Actions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to quickly and conveniently apply actions to refactor
 | |
|     your code by selecting them in a context menu. The actions available depend on
 | |
|     the position of the cursor in the code editor and on whether you are writing
 | |
|     C++ or QML code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To apply refactoring actions to C++ code, right-click an operand, conditional
 | |
|     statement, string, or name to open a context menu. In QML code, click an element
 | |
|     ID or name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the context menu, select \gui {Refactoring} and then select a refactoring action.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also press \gui {Alt+Enter} to open a context menu that contains refactoring
 | |
|     actions available in the current cursor position.
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \section2 Refactoring C++ Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|    You can apply the following types of refactoring actions to C++ code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Change binary operands
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Simplify if and while conditions (for example, move declarations out of
 | |
|         if conditions)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Modify strings (for example, set the encoding for a string to Latin-1, mark
 | |
|          strings translatable, and convert symbol names to camel case)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Create variable declarations
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Create method declarations and definitions
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes the refactoring actions for C++ code. The
 | |
|     action is available when the cursor is in the position described in the
 | |
|     Activation column.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \i Refactoring Action
 | |
|             \i Description
 | |
|             \i Activation
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Add Curly Braces
 | |
|             \i Adds curly braces to an if statement that does not contain a
 | |
|             compound statement. For example, rewrites
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     if (a)
 | |
|         b;
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|             as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     if (a) {
 | |
|         b;
 | |
|     }
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i if
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Move Declaration out of Condition
 | |
|             \i Moves a declaration out of an if or while condition to simplify the
 | |
|             condition. For example, rewrites
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     if (Type name = foo()) {...}
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|             as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     Type name = foo;
 | |
|     if (name) {...}
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i Name of the introduced variable
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Rewrite Condition Using ||
 | |
|             \i Rewrites the expression according to De Morgan's laws. For example,
 | |
|              rewrites:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     !a && !b
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|             as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     !(a || b)
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i &&
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Rewrite Using \e operator
 | |
|             \i Rewrites an expression negating it and using the inverse operator. For
 | |
|             example, rewrites:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o     \code
 | |
|     a op b
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     !(a invop b)
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o     \code
 | |
|     (a op b)
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     !(a invop b)
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o    \code
 | |
|     !(a op b)
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     (a invob b)
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \i <= < > >= == !=
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Split Declaration
 | |
|             \i Splits a simple declaration into several declarations. For example,
 | |
|             rewrites:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     int *a, b;
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     int *a;
 | |
|     int b;
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i Type name or variable name
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Split if Statement
 | |
|             \i Splits an if statement into several statements. For example, rewrites:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     if (something && something_else) {
 | |
|     }
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     if (something) {
 | |
|        if (something_else) {
 | |
|        }
 | |
|     }
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     and
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     if (something || something_else)
 | |
|         x;
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     with
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     if (something)
 | |
|         x;
 | |
|     else if (something_else)
 | |
|         x;
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \i && ||
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Swap Operands
 | |
|             \i Rewrites an expression in the inverse order using the inverse operator.
 | |
|             For example, rewrites:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     a op b
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     b flipop a
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i <= < > >= == != && ||
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Convert to Decimal
 | |
|             \i Converts an integer literal to decimal representation
 | |
|             \i Numeric literal
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Convert to Hexadecimal
 | |
|             \i Converts an integer literal to hexadecimal representation
 | |
|             \i Numeric literal
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Convert to Octal
 | |
|             \i Converts an integer literal to octal representation
 | |
|             \i Numeric literal
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Convert to Objective-C String Literal
 | |
|             \i Converts a string literal to an Objective-C string literal
 | |
|             if the file type is Objective-C(++). For example, rewrites the following strings
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     "abcd"
 | |
|     QLatin1String("abcd")
 | |
|     QLatin1Literal("abcd")
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     @"abcd"
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i String literal
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Enclose in QLatin1Char(...)
 | |
|             \i Sets the encoding for a character to Latin-1, unless the character is
 | |
|             already enclosed in QLatin1Char, QT_TRANSLATE_NOOP, tr, trUtf8,
 | |
|             QLatin1Literal, or QLatin1String. For example, rewrites
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     'a'
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     QLatin1Char('a')
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i String literal
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Enclose in QLatin1String(...)
 | |
|             \i Sets the encoding for a string to Latin-1, unless the string is
 | |
|             already enclosed in QLatin1Char, QT_TRANSLATE_NOOP, tr, trUtf8,
 | |
|             QLatin1Literal, or QLatin1String. For example, rewrites
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     "abcd"
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     QLatin1String("abcd")
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \i String literal
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Mark as Translatable
 | |
|             \i Marks a string translatable. For example, rewrites \c "abcd" with
 | |
|             one of the following options, depending on which of them is available:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     tr("abcd")
 | |
|     QCoreApplication::translate("CONTEXT", "abcd")
 | |
|     QT_TRANSLATE_NOOP("GLOBAL", "abcd")
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \i String literal
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i #include Header File
 | |
|             \i Adds the matching #include statement for a forward-declared class or struct
 | |
|             \i Forward-declared class or struct
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Add Definition in 'filename'
 | |
|             \i Inserts a definition stub for a member function declaration in the
 | |
|             implementation file
 | |
|             \i Method name
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Add 'Function' Declaration
 | |
|             \i Inserts the member function declaration that matches the member function
 | |
|             definition into the class declaration. The function can be public,
 | |
|             protected, private, public slot, protected slot, or private slot.
 | |
|             \i Method name
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Add Local Declaration
 | |
|             \i
 | |
|             Adds the type of an assignee, if the type of the right-hand side of the assignment
 | |
|             is known. For example, rewrites
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     a = foo();
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     Type a = foo();
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     where Type is the return type of \c {foo()}
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \i Assignee
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Convert to Camel Case...
 | |
|             \i Converts a symbol name to camel case, where elements of the name are joined
 | |
|             without delimiter characters and the initial character of each element is
 | |
|             capitalized. For example, rewrites \c an_example_symbol
 | |
|             as \c anExampleSymbol and \c AN_EXAMPLE_SYMBOL as \c AnExampleSymbol
 | |
|             \i Indentifier
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Complete Switch Statement
 | |
|             \i Adds all possible cases to a switch statement of the type \c enum
 | |
|             \i Switch
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Generate Missing Q_PROPERTY Members...
 | |
|             \i Adds missing members to a Q_PROPERTY:
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \c read method
 | |
|                 \o \c write method, if there is a WRITE
 | |
|                 \o \c {on...Changed} signal, if there is a NOTIFY
 | |
|                 \o data member with the name \c {m_<propertyName>}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|             \i Q_PROPERTY
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \section2 Refactoring QML Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|    You can apply the following types of refactoring actions to QML code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Rename IDs
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Split initializers
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Move a QML element into a separate file to reuse it in other
 | |
|         .qml files
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes the refactoring actions for QML code. The
 | |
|     action is available when the cursor is in the position described in the
 | |
|     Activation column.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \i Refactoring Action
 | |
|             \i Description
 | |
|             \i Activation
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Move Component into 'filename.qml'
 | |
|             \i Moves a QML element into a separate file
 | |
|             \i Element name
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Rename id
 | |
|             \i Renames all instances of an element ID in the currently open file
 | |
|             \i Element ID
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i Split Initializer
 | |
|             \i Reformats a one-line element into a multi-line element. For example,
 | |
|             rewrites
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     Item { x: 10; y: 20; width: 10 }
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     as
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     Item {
 | |
|         x: 10;
 | |
|         y: 20;
 | |
|         width: 10
 | |
|     }
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|             \i Element property
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
|    */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-qml-application.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-managing.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-creating.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Managing Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To set up a project, you first have to decide what kind of an
 | |
|     application you want to develop: whether you want a user interface
 | |
|     based on Qt Quick, Qt widgets, or HTML5. For a Qt Quick or HTML5 project,
 | |
|     you must also
 | |
|     choose the language to implement the application logic: C++ or JavaScript.
 | |
|     You can also create other kinds of projects, such as Qt console
 | |
|     applications, shared or static C++ libraries, or subprojects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use wizards to create and import projects. The wizards prompt you
 | |
|     to enter the settings needed for that particular type of project and create
 | |
|     the necessary files for you. You can add your own custom wizards to
 | |
|     standardize the way subprojects and classes are added to a project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You also need to choose a build system for the project. Qt Creator is
 | |
|     integrated with cross-platform systems for build automation: qmake and
 | |
|     CMake. In addition, you can import generic projects that do not use qmake
 | |
|     or CMake, and specify that Qt Creator ignores your build system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you want to develop applications for Symbian devices, you must choose
 | |
|     qmake or a compilation service at Forum Nokia to build the applications for
 | |
|     the Symbian devices target. The interface to the compilation service, Remote
 | |
|     Compiler, is installed as a part of the \QSDK. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Building with Remote Compiler}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you install the \QSDK, the build and run settings for the Maemo and
 | |
|     Symbian targets are set up automatically. However, you need to install and
 | |
|     configure some additional software on the devices to be able to connect to
 | |
|     them from the development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use sessions to store personal data, such as bookmarks and
 | |
|     breakpoints that are usually not of interest to other developers working on
 | |
|     the same projects. Sessions allow you to quickly switch between projects
 | |
|     when you work on several projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following sections describe how to manage projects:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating a Project}
 | |
|         \o \l{Opening a Project}
 | |
|         \o \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}
 | |
|         \o \l{Setting Up a qmake Project}
 | |
|         \o \l{Adding Libraries to qmake Projects}
 | |
|         \o \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}
 | |
|         \o \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}
 | |
|         \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}
 | |
|         \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}
 | |
|         \o \l{Managing Sessions}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-managing.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-creating.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-opening.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-new-project.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use wizards to create following types of projects:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Qt Quick Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Use QML to define the user interface and,
 | |
|         optionally, C++ or JavaScript to define the application logic
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Qt Widget Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Use \QD forms to define a Qt widget based
 | |
|         user interface and C++ to define the application logic
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Other Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o HTML5 based applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Qt console applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Shared or static C++ libraries
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Qt unit tests
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Qt Custom Designer Widgets
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Subprojects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a new project, select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project} and
 | |
|     select the type of your
 | |
|            project.
 | |
|            The contents of the wizard dialogs depend on the project type and
 | |
|            the build targets that you select in the \gui {Qt Versions} dialog.
 | |
|            Follow the instructions of the wizard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For examples of creating different types of projects, see
 | |
|     \l{Getting Started}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about creating Qt Quick projects, see
 | |
|     \l {Creating Qt Quick Projects}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To change the location of the project directory, and to make changes in
 | |
|     the build and run settings, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Projects} > \gui{General}.
 | |
|     \section1 Adding Files to Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use wizards also to add individual files to your projects.
 | |
|     You can create the following types of files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Qt resource files, which allow you to store binary files in the
 | |
|         application executable
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \QD forms and \QD form classes, which specify parts of user
 | |
|         interfaces in Qt widget based projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o QML files, which specify elements in Qt Quick projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o GLSL files that define fragment and vertex shaders in both Qt Quick
 | |
|         projects and Qt widget based projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o C++ class, source, or header files that you can use to write the
 | |
|         application logic in both Qt Quick projects and Qt widget based
 | |
|         projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o JavaScript files that you can use to write the application logic in
 | |
|         Qt Quick projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Text files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating C++ Classes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {C++ Class Wizard} allows you to create a C++ header and source file for
 | |
|     a new class that you can add to a C++ project. Specify the class name, base
 | |
|     class, and header and source files for the class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The  wizard supports namespaces. To use a namespace, enter a qualified
 | |
|     class name in the \gui {Class name} field. For example:
 | |
|     MyNamespace::MySubNamespace::MyClass.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cpp-class-wizard.png "Enter Class Name dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The names of the header and source file are based on the class name. To change the
 | |
|     default suffix of a file, click \gui Configure.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can create your own project and class wizards. For more information,
 | |
|     see \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating OpenGL Fragment and Vertex Shaders
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt provides support for integration with OpenGL implementations on all
 | |
|     platforms, which allows you to display hardware accelerated 3D graphics
 | |
|     alongside a more conventional user interface. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtopengl.html}{QtOpenGL Module}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the QGLShader class to compile OpenGL shaders written in the
 | |
|     OpenGL Shading Language (GLSL) and in the OpenGL/ES Shading Language
 | |
|     (GLSL/ES). QGLShader and QGLShaderProgram shelter you from the details of
 | |
|     compiling and linking vertex and fragment shaders.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use Qt Creator code editor to write fragment and vertex shaders
 | |
|     in GLSL or GLSL/ES. The code editor provides syntax highlighting and code
 | |
|     completion for the files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-new-opengl-file.png "New OpenGL file wizard"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Displaying Additional File Types in Projects Pane
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator determines whether to display files from the project folder
 | |
|     in the \gui Projects pane depending on the file type (.pro, .pri, .cpp,
 | |
|     .h, .ui, .qrc, and so on). To display other types of files, edit the
 | |
|     project file. Add filenames as values of the \c {OTHER_FILES} variable.
 | |
|     You can also use wildcards.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, the following code specifies that text files are displayed
 | |
|     in the \gui Projects pane:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     OTHER_FILES += *.txt
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This also makes the files available in the \gui Locator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding Subprojects to Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you create a new project, you can add it to another project as a subproject
 | |
|     in the \gui{Project Management} dialog. However, the root project must
 | |
|     specify that qmake uses the \c subdirs template to build the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a root project, select \gui {File > New File or Project... >
 | |
|     Other Project > Subdirs Project > Choose}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     On the \gui Summary page, select \gui {Finish & Add Subproject} to create
 | |
|     the root project and to add another project, such as a C++ library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The wizard creates a project file (.pro) that defines a \c subdirs template
 | |
|     and the subproject that you add as a value of the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-variable-reference.html#subdirs}{SUBDIRS variable}.
 | |
|     It also adds all the necessary files for the subproject.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add more subprojects, right-click the project name in the \gui Projects
 | |
|     pane, and select \gui {New Subproject} in the context menu.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove subprojects, right-click the project name in the \gui Projects
 | |
|     pane, and select \gui {Remove Subproject} in the context menu.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To specify dependencies, use the \gui{Add Library} wizard. For more information,
 | |
|     see \l{Adding Libraries to qmake Projects}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-creating.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-opening.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-qmake.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Opening a Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator stores information that it needs to build projects in a .user file.
 | |
|     If Qt Creator cannot find the file when you open an existing project, it prompts you
 | |
|     to enter the information. If you created the project by using another Qt Creator
 | |
|     instance, Qt Creator asks whether you want to use the old settings. The settings
 | |
|     are specific to the development environment, and should not be copied from one
 | |
|     environment to another. Therefore, we recommend that you click \gui No and enter
 | |
|     the information again in the \gui {Project Setup} dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Project Setup} dialog displays a list of development environments for
 | |
|     target platforms (such as desktop, Maemo devices, and Symbian devices) that are
 | |
|     installed on the development PC. Select the Qt versions that you want to use to build
 | |
|     the project for each target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-open-project-targets.png "Qt Versions dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The status \gui New indicates that Qt Creator did not find an existing build
 | |
|     for a particular development environment (Qt version) and target. Therefore,
 | |
|     Qt Creator starts out from a clean slate, and creates a new build in the directory
 | |
|     listed in the \gui {Build Directory} field.
 | |
|     By default, Qt Creator does a \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow build} and also
 | |
|     creates the directory. However, shadow building is not supported for the Symbian
 | |
|     target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have built the project before, Qt Creator can use the existing build
 | |
|     configuration to make the exact same build as found in the directory available to
 | |
|     Qt Creator. The \gui Status column displays the status \gui Import if Qt creator
 | |
|     found an existing build of the project. The status is displayed for each
 | |
|     available development environment.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you know you have a build, but it is not listed, click \gui {Import Existing
 | |
|     Shadow Build} to locate it. Select a directory, and Qt Creator scans it (including
 | |
|     subdirectories) for additional builds of the project. Qt Creator adds the found
 | |
|     builds to the target list with \gui Import status.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can edit the build configuration later. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Editing Build Configurations}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open a project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui File > \gui{Open File or Project} and select the project
 | |
|         to open.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Project Setup} dialog, select the Qt versions to use as
 | |
|         build targets for your project, and click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note If you have only one development environment installed, this dialog
 | |
|         is skipped.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator parses all the source files in the project and performs a semantic
 | |
|     analysis to build up the information that it needs for functions such as
 | |
|     navigation and finding usages. Qt Creator also scans for all include files in
 | |
|     your include path recursively, so that it can complete them.
 | |
|     Progress bars are displayed during parsing and scanning.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-managing-sessions.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-wizards.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-using.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Adding New Custom Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have a team working on a large application or several applications,
 | |
|     you might want to standardize the way the team members create projects
 | |
|     and classes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can copy the wizard templates in the template folders
 | |
|     to create your own project and class wizards. They are displayed in the
 | |
|     \gui New dialog that opens when you choose \gui {File > New File or Project}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In a project wizard, you can specify the files needed in a project.
 | |
|     You can add wizard pages to allow developers to specify settings for the
 | |
|     project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In a class wizard, you can allow developers to specify the class name, base
 | |
|     class, and header and source files for the class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To see how this works, rename wizard_example.xml as wizard.xml in the helloworld
 | |
|     and listmodels folders. After you restart Qt Creator, the \gui {Custom Classes}
 | |
|     and \gui {Custom Projects} categories appear in the \gui New dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-custom-project-wizards.png "The New dialog with custom projects and classes"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Overview of Custom Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A custom wizard defines the user interface of a wizard page. The values the user enters
 | |
|     in the wizard are assigned field names. Field name and value pairs are then passed to
 | |
|     the file creation process. File creation can happen in the following ways:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Template-based, where source files that contain placeholders for
 | |
|         the field names are provided. During processing, the placeholders are replaced
 | |
|         by the values from the wizard page. Optionally, modifier
 | |
|         characters are applied. For more information, see \l{Processing Template Files}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Generator script, where a script is called to create the files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note This option mainly exists to accommodate existing generator scripts or
 | |
|         cases where complicated algorithmic logic is required when generating files. Writing
 | |
|         cross-platform scripts is inherently difficult, and therefore, it is not recommended
 | |
|         for new wizards. For more information, see \l{Using Generator Scripts}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Custom wizards are located in subdirectories of the following directories:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c{share/qtcreator/templates/wizards}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o the local user's configuration folder,
 | |
|         \c{$HOME/.config/Nokia/qtcreator/templates/wizards}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c{%APPDATA%\Nokia\qtcreator\templates\wizards}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     They contain an XML configuration file called wizard.xml, the
 | |
|     template source files, and optionally, the generator script.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Project Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a project wizard:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Make a copy of the \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/helloworld} or
 | |
|         \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/listmodel} folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Modify the wizard_example.xml file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code determines the type of the wizard and its place
 | |
|         in the \gui New dialog:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <wizard version="1" kind="project"
 | |
|         class="qt4project" firstpage="10"
 | |
|         id="A.HelloWorld" category="B.CustomProjects">
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c version is the version of the file contents. Do not modify this value.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c kind specifies the type of the wizard: \c project or \c class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c class specifies the type of the project. Currently the only available
 | |
|             type is \c qt4project, which specifies a Qt console project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c firstpage specifies the place of the new page in the standard project
 | |
|             wizard. The value 10 ensures that the custom page appears after the standard
 | |
|             pages, as the last page of the wizard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c id is the unique identifier for your wizard. The letter specifies the
 | |
|             position of the wizard within the \c category. The HelloWorld wizard appears
 | |
|             as the first wizard in the second category in the \gui New dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c category is the category in which to place the wizard in the list.
 | |
|             The letter specifies the position of the category in the list in the \gui New
 | |
|             dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code specifies the icon and text that appear in the \gui New
 | |
|          dialog:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <icon>console.png</icon>
 | |
|         <description>Creates a hello-world-project with custom message.</description>
 | |
|         <description xml:lang="de">Erzeugt ein Hello-Welt-Projekt mit einer Nachricht.</description>
 | |
|         <displayname>Hello World</displayname>;
 | |
|         <displayname xml:lang="de">Hallo Welt</displayname>;
 | |
|         <displaycategory>Custom Projects</displaycategory>
 | |
|         <displaycategory xml:lang="de">Benutzerdefinierte Projekte</displaycategory>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c icon appears next to the \c displayName.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c description appears at the bottom of the \gui New dialog when you
 | |
|             select the display name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c displayName appears in the \gui New dialog, under the
 | |
|             \c displayCategory.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             You can add translations as values for the text elements. Specify the target
 | |
|             language as an attribute for the element. Use locale names (QLocale).
 | |
|             For example, \c {xml:lang="de"}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Files to be added to the project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o Template-based: The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
 | |
|             \code
 | |
|         <files>
 | |
|             <file source="main.cpp" openeditor="true" />
 | |
|             <file source="project.pro" target="%ProjectName%.pro" openproject="true" />
 | |
|             <file source="icon.png" target="%ProjectName%.png" binary="true" />
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
|             \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o \c source specifies the file to copy to the project. The files must be
 | |
|                 located in the wizard folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o \c openeditor indicates that the file is to be opened in an editor after
 | |
|                 the wizard has finished.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o \c binary indicates that the file is a binary file (for example, an
 | |
|                 image file). It is to be copied to the target folder as is. Placeholders
 | |
|                 are not replaced with values.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o \c target specifies the new filename for the file. The \c {%ProjectName%}
 | |
|                 variable is replaced with the string that users specify in the \gui Name
 | |
|                 field on the first page of the wizard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o \c openproject indicates that the file is a project file which is to be opened
 | |
|                 after the wizard has finished.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|             See also \l{Processing Template Files}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Generator-script: The following code specifies that the script \c generate.pl is to be used
 | |
|                to create the files:
 | |
|             \code
 | |
|             <generatorscript binary="generate.pl">
 | |
|                 <argument value="--class-name=%ClassName%"/>
 | |
|                 <argument value="--project-name=%ProjectName%"/>
 | |
|                 <argument value="--header-suffix=%CppHeaderSuffix%" omit-empty="true"/>
 | |
|                 <argument value="--source-suffix=%CppSourceSuffix%" omit-empty="true"/>
 | |
|                 <argument value="--description=%Description%" omit-empty="true" write-file="true"/>
 | |
|             </generatorscript>
 | |
|             \endcode
 | |
|             In each argument, the field placeholders are replaced by the field
 | |
|             values. There are additional boolean attributes which give fine-grained control:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|             \o \c omit-empty specifies that complete argument is to be omitted when all
 | |
|                placeholders expand to empty values. In the above example,
 | |
|                the option \c --source-suffix will not be passed to the script if the value is empty.
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \o \c write-file indicates that instead of the expanded value,
 | |
|                 the value will be written to a temporary file and its file name will be
 | |
|                 passed to the script instead. This is useful for multi-line text fields.
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|              See also \l{Using Generator Scripts}.
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code creates a page that specifies settings for the project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <!-- Create a 2nd wizard page with parameters -->
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle>Hello World Parameters</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle xml:lang="de">Hallo Welt Parameter</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fields>
 | |
|             <field mandatory="true" name="MESSAGE">
 | |
|                 <fieldcontrol class="QLineEdit" validator='^[^"]+$'  defaulttext="Hello world!" />
 | |
|                 <fielddescription>Hello world message:</fielddescription>
 | |
|                 <fielddescription xml:lang="de">Hallo-Welt-Nachricht:</fielddescription>
 | |
|             </field>
 | |
|         </fields>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c fieldpagetitle specifies the title of the page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c field specifies whether the field is mandatory (\c true or \c false).
 | |
|             You can use the value of the \c name field as a variable in other files (for
 | |
|             example, \c {%MESSAGE%}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c fieldcontrol specifies the field. \c class specifies the field type.
 | |
|             You can use interface objects from the QWidget class to create fields. This
 | |
|             example uses QLineEdit to create an input field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c validator specifies a regular expression to check the characters allowed in
 | |
|             the field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c defaulttext specifies text that appears in the field by default.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c fielddescription specifies the field name that appears on the wizard page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Class Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The widget.xml file for a class wizard is very similar to that for a project
 | |
|     wizard. The differences are discussed below.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a class wizard:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code specifies settings for the wizard:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <wizard version="1" kind="class" id="A.ListModel" category="B.CustomClasses">
 | |
| 
 | |
|            <description>Creates a QAbstractListModel implementation.</description>
 | |
|            <description xml:lang="de">Erzeugt eine Implementierung von QAbstractListModel.</description>
 | |
| 
 | |
|            <displayname>QAbstractListModel implementation</displayname>
 | |
|            <displayname xml:lang="de">Implementierung von QAbstractListModel</displayname>
 | |
| 
 | |
|            <displaycategory>Custom Classes</displaycategory>
 | |
|            <displaycategory xml:lang="de">Benutzerdefinierte Klassen</displaycategory>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         For more information about the elements and their values, see
 | |
|         \l {Creating Project Wizards}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <files>
 | |
|             <file source="listmodel.cpp" target="%ClassName:l%.%CppSourceSuffix%"  openeditor="true" />
 | |
|             <file source="listmodel.h" target="%ClassName:l%.%CppHeaderSuffix%"  openeditor="true" />
 | |
|         </files>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Here, \c target contains the following variables that are used to construct
 | |
|         the filename:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c {%ClassName:l%} is replaced with the value of the \c ClassName field.
 | |
|         The modifier \c l converts the string to lower case, to observe Qt
 | |
|         conventions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c {%CppSourceSuffix%} and \c {%CppHeaderSuffix%} are pre-defined.
 | |
|         For more information, see \l{Pre-defined Standard Variables}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <!-- Create parameter wizard page -->
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle>ListModel parameters</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle xml:lang="de">Parameter des ListModel</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fields>
 | |
|             <field name="ClassName">
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fieldcontrol class="QLineEdit" validator="^[a-zA-Z0-9_]+$" defaulttext="MyListModel" />
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fielddescription>Class name:</fielddescription>
 | |
|                 <fielddescription xml:lang="de">Klassenname:</fielddescription>
 | |
|             </field>
 | |
|             <field name="Datatype">
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fieldcontrol class="QComboBox" combochoices="QString,int" defaultindex="0" />
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fielddescription>Data type:</fielddescription>
 | |
|                 <fielddescription xml:lang="de">Datentyp:</fielddescription>
 | |
|             </field>
 | |
|         </fields>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         In addition to QLineEdit, QComboBox is used in the class wizard to create
 | |
|         a field. \c combochoices specifies the options in the combobox and
 | |
|         \c defaultindex specifies that QString is the default value.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Processing Template Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When processing a template source file, placeholders specifying the field names
 | |
|     in the format \c{%FIELDNAME%} are replaced by the values entered by the user.
 | |
|     In addition, modifier characters are supported. For example, \c{%FIELDNAME:u%}
 | |
|     specifies that the value is converted to upper case. This enables generating header
 | |
|     guards for C++ header files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following modifier characters are supported:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|     \o \c{l} for lower case.
 | |
|     \o \c{u} for upper case.
 | |
|     \o \c{c} for upper case initial letter ("project" > "Project").
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use conditions to add sections of the file depending on field values.
 | |
|     Use a syntax that is similar to C++ preprocessing, as demonstrated in
 | |
|     the profile of the \c{helloworld} example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     @if "%SCRIPT%" == "true"
 | |
|     QT += script
 | |
|     @endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The value of the Boolean (QCheckBox) field labeled \c{SCRIPT} determines
 | |
|     whether the script module is added. The expressions must expand to valid
 | |
|     Javascript expressions after field replacement.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Pre-defined Standard Variables
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition to the field values entered by the user, you can use
 | |
|     the following pre-defined standard values:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c {%ProjectName%} is replaced by the name of the project in the case
 | |
|     of project wizards.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c {%Path%} is replaced by the path to the target directory.
 | |
|     For classes, this is the directory, where the files
 | |
|     are created. For project wizards, an additional subdirectory
 | |
|     named after the project is created.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c {%TargetPath%} is replaced by the path to the directory where the actual files
 | |
|     are created. For non-project wizards, it is identical to \c %Path%.
 | |
|     For project wizards, it is \c %Path%/%ProjectName%.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c {%CppSourceSuffix%} is replaced by the default source suffix, which
 | |
|     is defined in Qt Creator in \gui {Tools > Options... > C++ > File Naming}.
 | |
|     For example, if users enter \bold MyClass, the filename becomes myclass.cpp
 | |
|     when the project is created.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c {%CppHeaderSuffix%} is replaced by the default header suffix, which
 | |
|     is also defined in \gui {File Naming}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Validating User Input
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify validation rules for user input. The rules consist of a Boolean
 | |
|     JavaScript expression and an error message. The placeholders in them are
 | |
|     replaced with values before they are evaluated or displayed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Consider the following rule used in the \l{Creating Class Wizards} example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     <validationrules>
 | |
|         <validationrule condition='"%ClassName%" != "QAbstractListModel"'>
 | |
|             <message>%ClassName% cannot be used as class name.</message>
 | |
|             <message xml:lang="de">%ClassName% kann nicht als Klassenname verwendet werden.</message>
 | |
|         </validationrule>
 | |
|     </validationrules>
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     It ensures that the class name entered by the user does not match the name of
 | |
|     the base class. If the validation fails, a red label displaying the message appears
 | |
|     at the bottom of the wizard page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Generator Scripts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The values entered in the wizard page are passed to the script
 | |
|     as command line arguments as defined by the wizard configuration file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition, the script must implement a \c{--dry-run} command line option.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator needs to know the file names before the files are created to check
 | |
|     whether files with identical names already exist, for example. Therefore,
 | |
|     script file generation is a two-step process:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o  Determine file names and attributes: The script is called with the command line
 | |
|         \c{--dry-run} option and the field values. It then prints the relative path
 | |
|         names of the files it intends to create, followed by comma-separated attributes
 | |
|         matching those of the \c{<file>} element, for example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         myclass.cpp,openeditor
 | |
|         myclass.h,openeditor
 | |
|         myproject.pro,openproject
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Create files: The script is called with the parameters only in the working directory.
 | |
|        It then actually creates the files. If directories are needed, the script
 | |
|        should create them, too.
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|    The \c{scriptgeneratedproject} sample wizard illustrates the usage.
 | |
|    A typical script invocation for this example (obtained by running Qt Creator with
 | |
|    \c{--customwizard-verbose}) looks as follows:
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \code
 | |
|    generate.pl --class-name=TestClass --project-name=TestProject --header-suffix=h --source-suffix=cpp --description=/tmp/qtcreatorj26629.txt
 | |
|    \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|    By default, the scripts are run in the directory corresponding to
 | |
|    \c %TargetPath%. This can be overriden by specifying the
 | |
|    attribute \c workingdirectory on the element \c generatorscript.
 | |
|    For example, if the script creates the project directory by itself,
 | |
|    %Path% can be specified. In that case, \c --dry-run should output
 | |
|    the correct relative paths or absolute paths constructed using the value of
 | |
|    \c %Path%.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-opening.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-qmake.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-qmake-libraries.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up a qmake Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The qmake tool helps simplify the build process for development projects
 | |
|     across different platforms. qmake automates the generation of makefiles
 | |
|     so that only a few lines of information are needed to create each makefile.
 | |
|     qmake can be used for any software project, whether it is written in Qt or not.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The qmake tool generates a makefile based on the information in a project
 | |
|     file that is generated by Qt Creator. It can generate makefiles for MinGW,
 | |
|     Microsoft Visual studio, and CSL ARM in Windows, and GNU Compiler Collection
 | |
|     (GCC) in Linux and Mac OS X.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about qmake, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.7/qmake-manual.html}{qmake Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Selecting the Qt Version
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to have multiple versions of Qt installed on
 | |
|     your development PC and use different versions for each of your projects.
 | |
|     For example, \QSDK contains special Qt versions for Maemo and Symbian
 | |
|     development.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If Qt Creator finds \bold qmake in the \c{PATH} environment variable, it uses
 | |
|     that version. The \l{glossary-system-qt}{ qmake version of Qt} is referred
 | |
|     to as \bold{Qt in PATH}. If you intend to use only one version of Qt and it
 | |
|     is already in the \c{PATH} and correctly set up for command line use, you do
 | |
|     not need to manually configure your Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add Qt versions to Qt Creator in \gui {Tools > Options... > Qt4 >
 | |
|     Qt Versions}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Typically, you select the Qt versions for a project when you use project
 | |
|     wizards to create the project. You can add Qt versions for a project in
 | |
|     \gui Projects mode \gui {Build Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compiling Projects with MinGW in Windows
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version for \bold MinGW:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-windows-add.png
 | |
|            and enter the name of the version in the \gui{Version name} field.
 | |
|         \o Enter the qmake binary path in the \gui{qmake location} field.
 | |
|         \o Enter the MinGW installation path in the \gui{MinGW directory} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-mingw.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Troubleshooting MinGW Compilation Errors
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If error messages displayed in the \gui {Compile Output} pane contain
 | |
|     paths where slashes are missing (for example, C:QtSDK),
 | |
|     check your PATH variable. At the command line, enter the following commands:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|         where sh.exe
 | |
|         where make.exe
 | |
|         where mingw32-make.exe
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If these commands show paths, they have been added to the global PATH variable
 | |
|     during the installation of a toolkit based on Cygwin or MinGW, even though
 | |
|     this is against Windows conventions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To keep working with the third-party toolkit, create a new shell link
 | |
|     that adds the required paths (as Visual Studio and Qt do). The shell link
 | |
|     must point to cmd.exe, as illustrated by the following example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \c {C:\Windows\System32\cmd.exe /K C:\path_to\myenv.bat}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     where the /K parameter carries out the command specified in the bat file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Create the myenv.bat file at \e path_to, which should be in a convenient location.
 | |
|     In the file, specify the paths to the toolkits. For example,
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \c  {set PATH=C:\path1;C:\path2;%PATH%}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     where \e path1 and \e path2 are paths to the toolkits.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Finally, remove the paths from the global PATH, reboot the computer, and
 | |
|     run the \c where commands again to verify that the global PATH is now clean.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the shell link to run the tools in the third-party toolkits.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compiling Projects with Microsoft Visual C++
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version for a \bold{Microsoft Visual C++} compiler:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Qt Creator automatically sets the correct environment variables for
 | |
|            compilation. Select the internal version number of the installed
 | |
|            Microsoft Visual C++ tool chain in the \gui Toolchain list.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-msvc.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If the \gui {Helpers} are available, but not in use, click
 | |
|         \gui Build for each available helper to take it to use. For more
 | |
|         information, see \l{Using Debugging Helpers}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compiling Qt for Symbian Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you install Qt for Symbian as a part of \QSDK, it is automatically
 | |
|     detected by Qt Creator. If you install other Symbian SDKs and register them
 | |
|     with devices.exe, Qt Creator automatically detects the Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a
 | |
|     Qt for Symbian version:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui{S60 SDK} you want the Qt Creator to use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-symbian.png
 | |
|         \o To build an application for your device using GCCE, enter the path
 | |
|            to the CSL ARM toolchain directory in
 | |
|            \gui{CSL\\GCCE directory}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            You do not need to specify this path if the compiler is included in
 | |
|            the \c{PATH} environment variable.
 | |
|         \o To build an application for the emulator (WINSCW toolchain), enter
 | |
|            the path to your Carbide C++ installation directory in
 | |
|            \gui{Carbide directory}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note You need to have Carbide C++ version 2.0 or later installed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To build an application using the Symbian build system (SBS v2) that
 | |
|            is available for Symbian OS 9.5 based SDKs, enter the path to the SBS
 | |
|            v2 toolchain directory in \gui{SBS v2 directory}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compiling Projects With Linux
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To compile a project in Qt Creator, Linux uses GNU Compiler Collection
 | |
|     (GCC). Intel Compiler Collection (ICC) is supported as a drop-in
 | |
|     replacement for GCC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-linux-add.png
 | |
|            and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version name}.
 | |
|         \o Enter the path to the qmake binary in \gui{qmake location}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compiling Projects With Mac OS X
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To compile a project in Qt Creator, Mac OS X uses GNU Compiler Collection
 | |
|     (GCC), which is part of Xcode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Qt Creator} > \gui Preferences... > \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-macosx-add.png
 | |
|            and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version Name}.
 | |
|         \o Enter the path to the qmake binary in \gui{qmake location}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-qmake.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-qmake-libraries.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-cmake.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Adding Libraries to qmake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition to Qt libraries, you can add other libraries to your projects.
 | |
|     The way the library is added depends on whether it is a system library or
 | |
|     your own library or a 3rd party library located in the build tree of the
 | |
|     current project or in another build tree.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-add-library-wizard.png "Add Library wizard"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Because system libraries do not typically change and are often found by
 | |
|     default, you do not need to specify the path to the library or to its includes
 | |
|     when you add it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For your own libraries and 3rd party libraries, you need to specify
 | |
|     the paths. Qt Creator tries to quess the include path for an external library,
 | |
|     but you need to check it and modify it if necessary. Qt Creator automatically
 | |
|     adds the include path for an internal library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For all libraries, select the target platforms for the application, library,
 | |
|     or plugin.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Specify whether the library is statically or dynamically linked. For a
 | |
|     statically linked internal library, Qt Creator adds dependencies
 | |
|     (PRE_TARGETDEPS) in the project file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Depending on the development platform, some options might be detected
 | |
|     automatically. For example, on Mac OS, the library type (\gui Library or
 | |
|     \gui Framework) is detected automatically and the option is hidden. However,
 | |
|     if you develop on another platform than Mac OS and want to build your
 | |
|     project for the Mac OS, you must specify the library type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The default convention on Windows is that the debug and release versions
 | |
|     of a library have the same name,
 | |
|     but are placed in different subdirectories, usually called \e debug and
 | |
|     \e release. If the library path does not contain either of these folders,
 | |
|     you cannot select the option to place the libraries in separate
 | |
|     folders.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Alternatively, the letter \e d can be added to the library name for the debug
 | |
|     version. For example, if the release version is called example.lib, the
 | |
|     debug version is called exampled.lib. You can specify that the letter
 | |
|     is added for the debug version and removed for the release version.
 | |
|     If the library name ends in \e d, deselect the \gui {Remove "d" suffix
 | |
|     for release version} option.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator supports code completion and syntax highlighting for the added
 | |
|     libraries once your project successfully builds and links to them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 To Add Libraries
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Projects pane, open the project file (.pro).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Right-click in the code editor to open the context menu and select
 | |
|         \gui {Add Library...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Follow the instructions of the wizard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about the project file settings, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-project-files.html#declaring-other-libraries}{Declaring other Libraries}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Example of Adding Internal Libraries
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following example describes how to add a statically linked internal
 | |
|     library to your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {File > New File or Project... > Other Projects >
 | |
|         C++ Library} to create the library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Introduction and Product Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-add-library-wizard-ex-1.png "Introduction and Product Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Type field, select \gui {Statically Linked Library}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Name field, give a name for the library. For example,
 | |
|         \bold mylib.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Follow the instructions of the wizard until you get to the
 | |
|         \gui {Project Management} dialog. In the \gui {Add to project}
 | |
|         list, select a project. For example, \bold myapp.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Projects pane, open the project file (.pro).
 | |
|         For example, \bold myapp.pro.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Right-click in the code editor to open the context menu and select
 | |
|         \gui {Add Library... > Internal Library > Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Library field, select \bold mylib and click \gui Next.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Finish to add the following library declaration to the
 | |
|         project file:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         win32:CONFIG(release, debug|release): LIBS += -L$$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/release/ -lmylib
 | |
|         else:win32:CONFIG(debug, debug|release): LIBS += -L$$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/debug/ -lmylib
 | |
|         else:symbian: LIBS += -lmylib
 | |
|         else:unix: LIBS += -L$$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/ -lmylib
 | |
| 
 | |
|         INCLUDEPATH += $$PWD/../../../projects/mylib
 | |
|         DEPENDPATH += $$PWD/../../../projects/mylib
 | |
| 
 | |
|         win32:CONFIG(release, debug|release): PRE_TARGETDEPS += $$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/release/mylib.lib
 | |
|         else:win32:CONFIG(debug, debug|release): PRE_TARGETDEPS += $$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/debug/mylib.lib
 | |
|         else:unix:!symbian: PRE_TARGETDEPS += $$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/libmylib.a
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-usability.html
 | |
|     \page creator-building-running.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-building-targets.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Building and Running Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides support for building, running, and deploying Qt
 | |
|     applications for desktop environment and mobile devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can set up the following configurations:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \e {Build configuration}, which contains everything you need to
 | |
|         compile the sources into binaries.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \e {Deploy configuration}, which handles the packaging and copying
 | |
|         of the necessary files to a location you want to run the executable at.
 | |
|         The files can be copied to a location in the file system of the development
 | |
|         PC or a mobile device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \e {Run configuration}, which starts the application in the location
 | |
|         where it was stored by the deploy configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, when you select the \gui Run function, Qt Creator builds, deploys,
 | |
|     and runs the project. For more information about how to change the default
 | |
|     behavior, see \l{Customizing the Build Process}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \section1 Setting Up a Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you install the \QSDK, the build and run settings for the toolchains
 | |
|     delivered with the \QSDK are set up automatically.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To view and modify the settings for currently open projects, switch to the
 | |
|     \gui Projects mode by pressing \key Ctrl+5.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-projectpane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add a target if the development environment for the target
 | |
|     platform is installed on the
 | |
|     development PC and the Qt version is configured. Click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-qt4-addbutton.png "Add Target button"
 | |
|     and select from a list of available
 | |
|     targets. To remove a target, select it and click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-target-remove.png "Remove Target button"
 | |
|     .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select the targets and use the \gui Build menu commands to
 | |
|     build, deploy, and run projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The project pane consists of the following tabs:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o \l{Running Applications on Multiple Targets}{Targets}
 | |
|        (If you have installed the development environment for only one target, the \gui Targets
 | |
|        tab is replaced by a \gui Build tab and a \gui Run tab.)
 | |
|        \o \l{Specifying Build Settings}{Build Settings}
 | |
|        \o \l{Specifying Run Settings}{Run Settings}
 | |
|        \o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}{Editor Settings}
 | |
|        \o \l{Specifying Dependencies}{Dependencies}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the \gui Build and \gui Run buttons to switch between
 | |
|     the build and run settings for the active project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have multiple projects open in Qt Creator, use the tabs at the
 | |
|     top of the window to navigate between their settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Customizing the Build Process
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To specify the relationship between the release, build, and deploy configurations, select
 | |
|     \gui {Tools > Options... > Project}. By default, the \gui {Always build project
 | |
|     before deploying it} and the \gui {Always deploy project before running it}
 | |
|     options are enabled. Therefore, when you select the \gui Run function,
 | |
|     Qt Creator builds, deploys, and runs the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-project-options-deploy.png "Project General Options"
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-building-running.html
 | |
|     \page creator-building-targets.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-running-targets.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Building Applications for Multiple Targets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can build applications for multiple targets. By default, when
 | |
|     you run the application on a target, you also build and deploy it to the
 | |
|     target, first. However, you can also perform each operation separately.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To check that the application code can be compiled and linked for a target,
 | |
|     you can build the project. The build errors and warnings are displayed in
 | |
|     the \gui {Build Issues} output pane. More detailed information is displayed in
 | |
|     the \gui {Compile Output} pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select a target for the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-target-selector.png "Target selector"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Build > Build Project} or press \key {Ctrl+B}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on the options you have, see \l{Specifying Build Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building for Symbian
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The tool chain for building applications locally on the development PC for
 | |
|     the \gui {Symbian Device} target is only supported on Windows.
 | |
|     If you develop on Linux or Mac OS, you must use the Remote Compiler
 | |
|     interface to a compilation service at Forum Nokia. For more information,
 | |
|     see \l{Building with Remote Compiler}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Troubleshooting Build Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you cannot build the application for a Symbian device, check that:
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o You selected the Symbian Device target to build the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o You selected the correct Qt version to build the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \section1 Building for Symbian Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|      Qt Creator does not create release configurations for the
 | |
|      \gui {Symbian Emulator} target, because Symbian Emulator supports only debug
 | |
|      builds.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-building-targets.html
 | |
|     \page creator-running-targets.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-build-settings.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Running Applications on Multiple Targets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, running an application also builds it and deploys it to a
 | |
|     location from where it can be run on the desktop, in Qt Simulator, or
 | |
|     on a mobile device that is connected to the development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To run executable files without deploying them first, deselect the \gui {Tools >
 | |
|     Options... > Project > Always deploy project before running it} option.
 | |
|     This allows you to test SIS files that you receive from Ovi Publishing or
 | |
|     Symbian Signed after you have them signed, for example.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on the options you have, see \l{Specifying Run Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running on Desktop
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Desktop as the target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-target-selector.png "Target selector"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running on Qt Simulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Simulator to test Qt applications that are intended
 | |
|     for mobile devices in an environment similar to that of the device. You
 | |
|     can change the information that the device has about its configuration
 | |
|     and environment.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Qt Simulator} as the target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about using the Qt Simulator, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qtsimulator/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running on Maemo
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Build and run the application for \l{Running on Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Build and run the application for \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}{Maemo Emulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Alternatively, you can build and run the application for a device:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Set up the MADDE development environment and specify a connection
 | |
|         to the device. For more information, see
 | |
|         \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Connect the device to the development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Qt Creator uses the compiler specified in the MADDE toolchain to
 | |
|         build the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Qt Creator generates an installation package, installs it on the device,
 | |
|         and executes the selected application.
 | |
|         The application views are displayed on the Nokia N900.
 | |
|         Command-line
 | |
|         output is visible in the Qt Creator \gui {Application Output} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Choose \gui {Projects > Maemo Run} to view the settings for deploying the
 | |
|         application on the connected device and creating the installation package.
 | |
|         For more information, see \l{Specifying Run Settings for Maemo Devices}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Debugging also works transparently.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running on Symbian
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Build and run the application for \l{Running on Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If no problems are found, build and run the application for a device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To test functionality that uses Symbian APIs, you can build and
 | |
|         run the application for Symbian Emulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Running on a Device
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Install the required software on the device. For more information, see
 | |
|         \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Connect the device to the development PC through a USB cable.
 | |
|         The target selector displays a green check mark when a
 | |
|         device is connected.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-device-connected.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The tool tip of the target selector shows more details about the actual
 | |
|         device that will be used when you run your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Start the \gui{App TRK} application on your device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can connect several devices to your development PC simultaneously.
 | |
|     In the details of the run configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target,
 | |
|     select the device to run your application on.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When your application is ready for delivery to users, specify run settings
 | |
|     for creating the final SIS installation packages. For more information,
 | |
|     see \l{Creating SIS Files}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you cannot run the application on a device, check that:
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \list
 | |
|         \o The Nokia USB drivers that come with \e{PC Suite} or \e{Ovi Suite}
 | |
|         have been installed on the development PC.
 | |
|         \o The device is connected through USB cable in \e{PC Suite} mode.
 | |
|         \o \gui{App TRK} is running on the device, using the USB connection,
 | |
|            with the status \e connected.
 | |
|         \o The device is detected and selected in the run configuration
 | |
|            details.
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If this does not help to solve your problem, search the qt-creator@trolltech.com
 | |
|     mailing list archives or provide feedback to us via the methods described on the
 | |
|     \l{http://developer.qt.nokia.com/wiki/Category:Tools::QtCreator}{Qt Creator Development Wiki}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Running on Symbian Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select
 | |
|     the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target as the active one, and build and run your
 | |
|     project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you cannot run the application in the emulator, check that:
 | |
|      \list
 | |
|         \o You selected the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target for your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If you cannot select \gui {Symbian Emulator} as target, check that
 | |
|         Carbide.c++ is installed correctly and that the path to the Carbide.c++
 | |
|         installation directory is specified in the \gui{Carbide directory} field
 | |
|         in the build settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If the emulator process cannot be started, try closing Qt Creator and
 | |
|            starting the application directly from your file manager. Having
 | |
|            done this, Qt Creator should be able to run your projects in the
 | |
|            emulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-publish-ovi.html
 | |
|     \page creator-remote-compiler.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-version-control.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Building with Remote Compiler
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Remote Compiler} target is an interface to a compilation service at
 | |
|     Forum Nokia. It provides a simple, standardized environment for building Qt
 | |
|     applications and creating installation packages for Symbian and Maemo devices
 | |
|     when you do not have the necessary tool chains and SDKs installed or they are
 | |
|     not supported on the development PC. You can choose from a set of supported
 | |
|     devices, such as S60 3rd Edition or S60 5th Edition devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Remote Compiler is an experimental component that you must install
 | |
|     separately from the package that is included in the \QSDK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Start > \QSDK > Maintain \QSDK} to open the
 | |
|         \gui {Maintain \QSDK} tool.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Package Manager}, select \gui {Experimental >
 | |
|         Remote Compiler}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In Qt Creator, choose \gui {Tools > Options > Projects > Remote Compiler}
 | |
|         to log on to Forum Nokia.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image remotecompiler-fn-logon.png "Remote Compiler options"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Projects}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click
 | |
|         \inlineimage qtcreator-qt4-addbutton.png "Add Target button"
 | |
|         and select \gui {Remote Compiler} to add Remote Compiler as a target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Add to add mobile device platforms as build configurations.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select a build configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Build > Build All}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The installation package is generated in the \gui {Build directory} on
 | |
|     the development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about Remote Compiler, choose \gui {Help > Contents >
 | |
|     Remote Compiler}. The document is added during the installation of
 | |
|     Remote Compiler.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-running-targets.html
 | |
|     \page creator-build-settings.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-run-settings.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Build Settings
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Different build configurations allow you to quickly switch between
 | |
|     different build settings. By default, Qt Creator creates \bold debug
 | |
|     and \bold release build configurations. A debug build contains additional
 | |
|     debug symbols that you need for debugging the application but that you
 | |
|     can leave out from the release version. Generally, you use the debug
 | |
|     configuration for testing and the release configuration for creating
 | |
|     the final installation file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You specify build settings in the \gui Projects mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-projectpane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a new build configuration, click \gui Add and select the type of
 | |
|     configuration you would like to add. You can add as many build
 | |
|     configurations as you need.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To delete the build configuration currently selected, click \gui Remove.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Editing Build Configurations
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To edit a build configuration:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select the build configuration you want to edit in
 | |
|            \gui{Edit Build Configuration}.
 | |
|         \o In section \gui General, you can specify:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o The \l{glossary-project-qt}{Qt version} you want to use to
 | |
|                build your project. For more information, see
 | |
|                \l{Selecting the Qt version}.
 | |
|             \o The tool chain required to build the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \note Only tool chains that are compatible with the selected Qt version
 | |
|                are available.
 | |
|             \o The build directory for the project.
 | |
|                By default, projects are built in a separate directory
 | |
|                from the source directory, as \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds}.
 | |
|                This keeps the files generated for each target platform separate.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \note Shadow building is not supported by the Symbian build system.
 | |
|                Also, shadow building on Windows is not supported for Maemo.
 | |
|                If you only build for one target platform, you can deselect
 | |
|                the \gui{Shadow build} checkbox.
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The build configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target
 | |
|     uses the GCCE tool chain by default. If you want to build
 | |
|     for the device using RVCT, install the RVCT tool chain, and then
 | |
|     select it in the \gui {Tool chain} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting External Processes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator executes external processes to accomplish tasks such as building
 | |
|     and running applications. To execute the processes, Qt Creator uses shell
 | |
|     commands that are native to the system. It constructs the commands from
 | |
|     an executable name and optional command line arguments.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The executable name is specified in the executable fields: \gui qmake,
 | |
|     \gui Make, \gui Command, or \gui Executable. It is either derived from the
 | |
|     project or specified manually. When you specify executables manually, you
 | |
|     can reference environment variables and macros. However, no quoting rules
 | |
|     apply.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify command-line arguments in the arguments fields: \gui {Additional
 | |
|     arguments}, \gui {Command arguments}, \gui {Make arguments}, or \gui Arguments.
 | |
|     You can create shell command lines that can contain redirection and other
 | |
|     advanced constructs. However, some more complex use cases, such as piping
 | |
|     test data into the application being tested or grouping commands, are not
 | |
|     supported because the value of the \gui Executable field is always placed
 | |
|     first when constructing the command.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Environment Variables
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use any environment variables as values in the fields. For a list
 | |
|     of variable names, click \gui {Build Environment > Details} in the
 | |
|     \gui {Build Settings}. Variables are referenced using the platform's native
 | |
|     syntax: $VARNAME or ${VARNAME} on Unix and %VARNAME% on Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Macros
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use macros in arguments, executable paths, and working directories.
 | |
|     The macros take care of quoting their expansions, so you do not need to
 | |
|     put them in quotes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following macros are available:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o %{buildDir}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o %{sourceDir}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Build Steps
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The build system of Qt Creator is built on qmake and make. In
 | |
|     \gui{Build Steps} you can change the settings for qmake and make. Qt
 | |
|    Creator runs the make command using the Qt version defined for the current
 | |
|     build configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-steps.png "Build steps"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To override the shell command that Qt Creator constructs by default, remove
 | |
|     the build step and add a custom build step that specifies another shell
 | |
|     command.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Adding Custom Build Steps
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add custom steps to the build settings, select \gui {Add Build Step >
 | |
|     Custom Process Step}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, custom steps are disabled. To activate a custom step, select
 | |
|     the \gui{Enable custom process step} check-box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-steps-custom.png "Custom Process Step"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Clean Steps
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the cleaning process to remove intermediate files. This process
 | |
|     might help you to fix obscure issues during the process of building a
 | |
|     project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-clean-steps.png "Clean steps"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can define the cleaning steps for your builds in the \gui{Clean Steps}:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To add a clean step using make or a custom process, click
 | |
|            \gui{Add Clean Step} and select the type of step you want to add.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            By default, custom steps are disabled. To activate a custom step,
 | |
|            select the \gui{Enable custom process step} check-box.
 | |
|         \o To remove a clean step, click \gui{Remove Item}.
 | |
|         \o To change the order of steps, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-movestep.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Build Environment
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify the environment you want to use for building in the
 | |
|     \bold{Build Environment} section. By default, the environment in which Qt
 | |
|     Creator was started is used and modified to include the Qt version.
 | |
|     Depending on the selected Qt version, Qt Creator automatically sets the
 | |
|     necessary environment variables. You can edit existing environment
 | |
|     variables or add, reset and unset new variables based on your project
 | |
|     requirements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-environment.png "Build Environment"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Clearing the System Environment
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To build with a clean system environment, select the \gui {Clear system
 | |
|     environment} check box. Qt Creator discards the current environment, and
 | |
|     populates a clean system environment with the environment variables that the
 | |
|     compilers and tools need. Therefore, the environment is never totally empty,
 | |
|     even after you clear it.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-build-settings.html
 | |
|     \page creator-run-settings.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-settings.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Run Settings
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically creates run configurations for your project.
 | |
|     To view and modify the settings, select \gui {Projects > Run}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The settings to specify depend on the type of the project: Qt project
 | |
|     or Qt Quick project, and on the target for the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Click \gui Add to add run settings for a project and \gui Remove to remove
 | |
|     the current settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Run Settings for qmake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The run configurations for qmake projects derive their executable from the parsed .pro
 | |
|     files.
 | |
|     For more information on how the commands are constructed, see
 | |
|     \l{Starting External Processes}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Specifying Run Settings for Desktop Targets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify command line arguments to be passed to the executable
 | |
|     and the working directory to use. The working directory defaults to
 | |
|     the directory of the build result.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For console applications, check the \gui{Run in Terminal} check box.
 | |
|     If you need to run with special environment variables set up, you
 | |
|     also do it in the run configuration settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-pprunsettings.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also create custom executable run configurations where you
 | |
|     can set the executable to be run. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Specifying a Custom Executable to Run}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Specifying Run Settings for Symbian Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically detects Symbian devices that are connected to
 | |
|     the development PC with a USB cable.
 | |
|     If only one device is detected, the application is deployed to it
 | |
|     and run on it. If multiple devices are connected to the PC,
 | |
|     make sure that the correct device is selected in the
 | |
|     \gui {Symbian Device} run settings for your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also pass command line arguments to your application on the device.
 | |
|     Press the \gui{Device info button} to get more information about the selected
 | |
|     device, such as the CPU type and the running TRK version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-symbian-run-settings.png "Run settings for Symbian devices"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you deploy the application for the \gui{Symbian Device} target, Qt
 | |
|     Creator generates a Symbian installation system (SIS) file in the project folder
 | |
|     and copies it to the device that is connected to the development PC.
 | |
|     If no device is connected, you must remove the \gui {Deploy SIS Package} step,
 | |
|     to create the package. Click \gui {Remove Item} to skip the step.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-remove-deploy-step.png "Removing deploy steps"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you are ready to publish the application on Ovi Store or some other
 | |
|     channel, you must make sure that the SIS file meets the requirements for
 | |
|     publishing and installing applications on Symbian devices. For more information,
 | |
|     see \l{Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Specifying Run Settings for Maemo Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To run an application on a Maemo device, create and select
 | |
|     a device configuration in the Maemo run settings for your project.
 | |
|     You can also pass command line arguments to your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-screenshot-run-settings-maemo.png "Run settings for Maemo devices"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To run and debug applications on Maemo devices, you must create connections
 | |
|     from the development PC to the devices. Click \gui {Manage device
 | |
|     configurations} to create connections. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l {Configuring Connections in Qt Creator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, Qt Creator runs the remote gdbserver daemon on the device for
 | |
|     debugging. However, if the sysroot does not match that of the device, you
 | |
|     can run remote gdb, instead. Select the \gui {Run remote gdb} option in
 | |
|     \gui {Debugging details}. Select the \gui {Set debugger} link to specify
 | |
|     settings for gdb.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you run the application on the \gui{Maemo} target, Qt Creator generates
 | |
|     a Debian installation package in the build directory by default. You can deliver
 | |
|     the installation package to users for installation on Maemo devices that are of
 | |
|     the same type and run the same firmware as the connected device. For more
 | |
|     information, see \l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying a Custom Executable to Run
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you use cmake or the generic project type in Qt Creator, or want
 | |
|     to run a custom desktop executable, create a \gui {Custom Executable}
 | |
|     run configuration for your project. For example, when working on a library,
 | |
|     you can run a test application that links against the library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Specify the executable to run, command line arguments, working directory,
 | |
|     and environment variables to use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-run-custom-exe.png "Run settings for custom executables"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Run Settings for Qt Quick Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select run settings in the \gui {Run configuration} field. The settings
 | |
|     are specified automatically and, you mostly need to change them if you
 | |
|     develop applications that use both C++ and QML:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Custom QML Viewer} is the path to the \QQV executable.
 | |
|         Qt Creator ships with a specific version of \QQV and imported
 | |
|         modules, which is used by default. If you develop Qt Quick applications
 | |
|         that contain C++ plugins, you must select the \QQV version
 | |
|         shipped with your Qt version here.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {QML Viewer arguments} sets arguments for running \QQV.
 | |
|         The \c{-I <directory>} argument searches for C++ or QML plugins from
 | |
|         the project folder. For a list of available arguments, enter \c {qml --help}
 | |
|         on the command line.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Main QML file} is the Qt Quick project file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui Debugger allows you to select the languages to debug:
 | |
|         \gui{C++} and \gui QML. \gui {Debug port} is the port to access \QQV.
 | |
|         You can use any free port in the registered port range.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Opening a socket at a well-known port presents a security risk. Anyone
 | |
|     on the Internet could connect to the application that you are debugging and
 | |
|     execute any JavaScript functions. Therefore, you must make sure that the port
 | |
|     is properly protected by a firewall.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-run-settings.png "Run settings for Qt Quick projects"
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-deployment-symbian.html
 | |
|     \page creator-deployment-maemo.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-publish-ovi.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify settings for deploying applications to Maemo devices in the
 | |
|     project .pro file. You can view the settings in the \gui {Run Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-maemo-deployment.png "Deploy to device"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The files to be installed are listed in the
 | |
|     \gui {Deploy to Device} step, the \gui {Files to install for subproject}
 | |
|     field. The
 | |
|     \gui {Local File Path} field displays the location of the file on the development
 | |
|     PC. The \gui {Remote Directory} field displays the folder where the file is installed on
 | |
|     the device.
 | |
|     Text in red color indicates that the information is missing. Select the
 | |
|     text to edit it and add the missing information.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use desktop files to display icons on the home screen of the
 | |
|     device. To add desktop files to the project file, select \gui {Add Desktop
 | |
|     File}. To specify the icon file to display, select \gui {Add Launcher
 | |
|     Icon...}. To remove desktop files and icons, delete the definitions from
 | |
|     the project file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you develop your own libraries, Qt Creator needs to be able to find
 | |
|     them when you compile projects depending on them. When you install MADDE,
 | |
|     an instance of the device file
 | |
|     system, called sysroot, is installed to the development PC. Libraries are copied to
 | |
|     sysroot if the \gui {Also deploy to sysroot} check box is selected.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Debian Installation Packages
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you run the application on the \gui{Maemo} target, Qt Creator generates
 | |
|     a Debian installation package in the build directory by default. You can deliver
 | |
|     the installation package to users for installation on Maemo devices that are of
 | |
|     the same type and run the same firmware as the connected device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-maemo-deb-package.png "Create installation package"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The name of the installation package is displayed in the \gui {Package name}
 | |
|     field in the \gui {Create Package} step. You can change the version number
 | |
|     in the \gui {Package version} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify information that users see on a delivery channel, such as
 | |
|     Ovi Store. You can specify a short description of the application, package
 | |
|     name, and application icon.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Debian control file contains an application icon in encoded form. To add the
 | |
|     application icon to the file, select it in the \gui {Icon to be displayed
 | |
|     in Package Manager} field.
 | |
|     For more information about icon files and adding them manually, see
 | |
|     \l{ http://wiki.maemo.org/Packaging#Displaying_an_icon_in_the_Application_Manager_next_to_your_package}{Displaying an icon in the Application Manager next to your package}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Qt Creator automates this process for you.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides templates for a set of files that must be included
 | |
|     in Debian packages. When you create a Maemo target for a project, Qt Creator
 | |
|     asks whether packaging files are to be added to the project and to version
 | |
|     control. If you plan to edit the packaging files, add them to version
 | |
|     control.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To edit the files, select a file in \gui {Adapt Debian
 | |
|     file} and click \gui Edit. The file opens in the text editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-maemo-emulator.html
 | |
|     \page creator-deployment.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-deployment-symbian.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Deploying Applications to Mobile Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Deploy configurations in the \gui Project mode \gui {Run Settings} handle
 | |
|     the packaging of the application as an executable and copying it to a
 | |
|     location you want to run the executable at. The files can be copied to a location
 | |
|     in  the file system of the development PC or a mobile device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you are ready to publish the application on Ovi Store or some other
 | |
|     channel, you must make sure that the installation file meets the requirements for
 | |
|     publishing and installing applications to Symbian or Maemo devices. The following
 | |
|     sections describe the steps that you have to take to create installation packages
 | |
|     for Symbian and Maemo devices and for publishing on Ovi Store:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \l{Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices}
 | |
|         \o \l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}
 | |
|         \o \l{Publishing Applications to Ovi Store}
 | |
|         \o \l{Building with Remote Compiler}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-deployment.html
 | |
|     \page creator-deployment-symbian.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-deployment-maemo.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section describes how to create installation packages that meet the
 | |
|     requirements for installing applications to Symbian devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating SIS Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you deploy the application for the \gui{Symbian Device} target, Qt
 | |
|     Creator automatically generates a Symbian installation system (SIS) file
 | |
|     in the project folder. You can deliver the installation file to users for
 | |
|     installation on Symbian devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The name of the installation file is displayed in the \gui {Installation file}
 | |
|     field in the \gui {Run Settings}. In the \gui {Installation drive} field, select the drive on the device
 | |
|     to install the application to. To suppress notifications on the device during the
 | |
|     installation, select the \gui {Silent installation} check box. If the silent
 | |
|     installation fails, Qt Creator attempts installation again, this time displaying
 | |
|     notifications and error messages.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a SIS package without copying it to the device (for example, to submit it
 | |
|     to Ovi Signed or Symbian Signed), create a deploy configuration that contains only the
 | |
|     \gui {Create SIS Package} step.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-run-settings-create.png "Create SIS Package step"
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Signing SIS Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Only installation files signed with a certificate and private key are
 | |
|     allowed to be installed onto Symbian devices. By default, Qt Creator
 | |
|     self-signs the installation file. This self-signing allows you to install
 | |
|     the application on a mobile  device but places limits on what you can do
 | |
|     with the installation file, including:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  Self-signed applications cannot access the more sensitive
 | |
|            \l{Capabilities and Signing}{capabilities} of the mobile device.
 | |
|        \o  Security warnings will be displayed when you install the self-signed
 | |
|            application on a mobile device.
 | |
|        \o  Self-signed applications cannot be published to Ovi
 | |
|            Store.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To get around these limitations, you need to go through the Symbian Signed
 | |
|     or Ovi Signed process. The Symbian Signed organisation manages a public key
 | |
|     infrastructure to provide public authentication of the information in the
 | |
|     application signing certificates. Their security partner can validate your
 | |
|     certificate and give you a Publisher ID. Then, when you sign an
 | |
|     application, other people can be confident that the information in your
 | |
|     certificate is correct and that the application does actually come from you.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Ovi Signed is a variant of the Symbian Signed certification provided by Ovi
 | |
|     Publishing. It is limited to the Basic and System capability sets
 | |
|     (Express Signing). Participants can submit an unsigned SIS file to Ovi
 | |
|     Publishing for signing, quality assurance, packaging with Nokia Smart Installer
 | |
|     for Symbian, and publishing on Ovi Store. For more information about how
 | |
|     to participate and a list
 | |
|     of supported Nokia devices, see
 | |
|     \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/Distribute/Packaging_and_signing.xhtml}{Packaging and Signing}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     There are also options that do not require you to get a Publisher ID. For
 | |
|     more detail about how the Symbian Signed process works, see
 | |
|     \l{https://www.symbiansigned.com}{Symbian Signed}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you have your own certificate and private key, you can specify them in
 | |
|     the \gui{Create SIS Package} step in the \gui {Run Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-signing.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If your private key is protected by a passphrase, Qt Creator asks you for the
 | |
|     passphrase when the package is signed and offers to store it. However, storing
 | |
|     passphrases in Qt Creator presents a security risk. To make Qt Creator forget
 | |
|     all saved passphrases, click \gui {Reset Passphrases}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Capabilities and Signing
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Capabilities allow the Symbian platform to control access by applications to
 | |
|     the functionality provided by the platform APIs. Access to capabilities is
 | |
|     determined by the device configuration and how the application has been signed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Symbian Signed offers the following signing options depending on the
 | |
|     capabilities that the application accesses:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \bold{Express signed} for applications that access only user and system
 | |
|         capabilities.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \bold{Certified signed} for applications that access also restricted or
 | |
|         device manufacturer capabilities.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note You need to request the rights to access device manufacturer
 | |
|         capabilities from the manufacturer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about how to choose the appropriate signing option and
 | |
|     how you can check which capabilities you need, see
 | |
|     \l{https://www.symbiansigned.com}{Symbian Signed}
 | |
|     and
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/platform-notes-symbian.html#required-capabilities}{Required Capabilities for Qt Applications}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on how to define capabilities for a project, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-platform-notes.html#capabilities}{Capabilities}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note In Qt 4.7.1 and later, if you select the \gui {Self-signed certificate}
 | |
|     option, the SIS generation process checks that the package can be self-signed.
 | |
|     If problems are found, it attempts to fix the package. If fixes cannot be made,
 | |
|     a message appears in the \gui {Compile Output} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following modifications can be made:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Package UID is changed to an UID from the unprotected range (if it was
 | |
|         from the protected range).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Vendor ID is set to zero on all binaries included in the package file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o All restricted and device manufacturer capabilities are removed from all
 | |
|         libraries included in the package file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The application UID or capabilities used in executables (.exe) cannot be changed,
 | |
|     because that would break the application. If the executables use protected UIDs
 | |
|     or restricted or device manufacturer capabilities, signing fails and an error
 | |
|     message appears in the \gui {Compile Output} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Smart Installer for Symbian Packages
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To deploy Qt applications on Symbian devices, you must install the software that Qt applications
 | |
|     require, typically Qt, QtWebkit, and Open C. Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian makes it easier
 | |
|     for users to install Qt applications to Symbian phones by checking whether the device contains
 | |
|     the necessary software and by installing the missing pieces.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For this to work, the Nokia Smart Installer must be packaged with the Qt application. The
 | |
|     application SIS file must first be Symbian Signed or Ovi Signed. The capabilities used in the applications
 | |
|     determine, which signing option must be selected. The wrapper package must be signed using
 | |
|     either the same option or a more extensive option than the application SIS.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you use Ovi Signed, you can just submit an unsigned SIS file to Ovi Publishing.
 | |
|     Ovi signs the file for you and packages it with Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian.
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Publishing Applications to Ovi Store}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can either install the Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian as part of
 | |
|     the \QSDK, or download and install it from the
 | |
|     \l{http://wiki.forum.nokia.com/index.php/Nokia_Smart_Installer_for_Symbian}{Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian}
 | |
|     wiki.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To package Nokia Smart Installer with the application, select the \gui {Create Smart Installer
 | |
|     package} check box. This ensures that up-to-date and appropriate versions of Qt and its
 | |
|     dependencies are installed on devices. Further, it reduces the file size of the application you
 | |
|     publish, because you do not have to deliver the required libraries.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Nokia has reserved the following UIDs to be used with Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o 0xA000D7CE for self-signed applications
 | |
|         \o 0x2002CCCF for Ovi Store or Symbian Signed packages
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Self-signed Smart Installer Packages
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a self-signed Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian wrapped .sis file,
 | |
|     you must use an UID from the unprotected UID range, provided by Symbian Signed
 | |
|     and the wrapper package UID value 0xA000D7CE. If you used the Qt Creator project
 | |
|     wizard to create the project, this wrapper package UID is used by default.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Make sure that the source directory is clean. For example, if you use git,
 | |
|         enter the following command:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \c {git clean -dfx}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Projects to edit the \gui {Build Settings} for the
 | |
|         \gui {Symbian Device} target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui Release configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Open the \gui {Run Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create SIS Package} step, select \gui {Self-signed certificate}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Deploy SIS Package} step, click \gui {Remove Item} to
 | |
|         skip the step of copying the SIS file to a device. The SIS file is created
 | |
|         in the project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-remove-deploy-step.png "Removing deploy steps"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To package Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian with the application, select
 | |
|         the \gui {Create Smart Installer package} check box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Edit the project .pro file to use the correct UIDs for the application and
 | |
|         the wrapper package, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \code
 | |
|        symbian {
 | |
|             TARGET.UID3 = 0xE4DE5D27
 | |
|             DEPLOYMENT.installer_header=0xA000D7CE
 | |
| 
 | |
|             vendorinfo = \
 | |
|             "%{\"CustomVendor-EN\"}" \
 | |
|             ":\"CustomVendor\""
 | |
| 
 | |
|             my_deployment.pkg_prerules = vendorinfo
 | |
|             DEPLOYMENT += my_deployment
 | |
|         }
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Build > Run Project}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically generates a wrapper package in the project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Symbian Signed Smart Installer Packages
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If the application uses functions that require advanced capabilities (AllFiles,
 | |
|     DRM, TCB, CommDD, DiskAdmin, NetworkControl, MultimediaDD), you must use the
 | |
|     standard Symbian Signed process to have the application Symbian Signed. Depending
 | |
|     on the capabilities used, you may use either the Express Signed or the Certified
 | |
|     Signed path, or the manufacturer-specific channel (for AllFiles, DRM, and TCB).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Make sure that the source directory is clean. For example, if you use git,
 | |
|         enter the following command:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \c {git clean -dfx}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Projects to edit the \gui {Build Settings} for the
 | |
|         \gui {Symbian Device} target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui Release configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Open the \gui {Run Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create SIS Package} step, specify the developer certificate
 | |
|         and key in the \gui {Custom certificate} and \gui {Key file} fields.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Deploy SIS Package} step, click \gui {Remove Item} to
 | |
|         skip the step of copying the SIS file to a device. The SIS file is created
 | |
|         in the project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Edit the project .pro file to use the correct UIDs and vendor information
 | |
|         for the application, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \code
 | |
|        symbian {
 | |
|             TARGET.UID3 = 0x2000D7D1
 | |
|             DEPLOYMENT.installer_header=0x2002CCCF
 | |
| 
 | |
|             vendorinfo = \
 | |
|             "%{\"CustomVendor-EN\"}" \
 | |
|             ":\"CustomVendor\""
 | |
| 
 | |
|             my_deployment.pkg_prerules = vendorinfo
 | |
|             DEPLOYMENT += my_deployment
 | |
|         }
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Build > Run Project}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Submit the created .sis file to Symbian Signed for certification.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Ensure that your application complies with the Symbian Signed
 | |
|         Test Criteria before submitting the file for certification. Also, if the file is
 | |
|         intended for Ovi Store publishing, verify that the application complies with Ovi
 | |
|         Store publishing requirements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o After receiving the .sis file from Symbian Signed, copy it over the old
 | |
|         application.sis.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note The instructions below assume that you have installed \QSDK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To package Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian with the application, choose
 | |
|         \gui {Start > Qt SDK > Symbian > Qt for Symbian Command Prompt}
 | |
|         to open the Qt command line environment.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Change to the project directory. For example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \c{cd C:\Sources\Application}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To create a Smart Installer wrapper package, enter the following
 | |
|         command:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \c {C:\Sources\Application> make ok_installer_sis QT_SIS_CERTIFICATE=publisherid.cer QT_SIS_KEY=publisherid.key}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Submit the created wrapped .sis file, application_installer.sis, to
 | |
|         Symbian Signed. Express Signed is a suitable signing option for the wrapper
 | |
|         package. The capabilities used in the application do not play a role here,
 | |
|         because the wrapper package is already signed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically generates a wrapper package in the project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Ensure that your application complies with the requirements before submitting
 | |
|     the file to Ovi Store.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about the qmake DEPLOYMENT variable, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-variable-reference.html#deployment}{qmake Variable Reference}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about the Nokia Smart Installer, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/smart-installer/index.html}{Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Note: Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian is only available on Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Application UID
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A UID is a globally unique identifier that is used to
 | |
|     uniquely identify, for example, an object or file type. In Symbian development,
 | |
|     objects are identified by compound identifiers that are constructed from three
 | |
|     UIDs, namely UID1, UID2, and UID3. UID1 and UID2 specify the category of an
 | |
|     object, whereas UID3 identifies a particular object, such as an application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you create a \gui {Mobile Qt Application}, Qt Creator adds a UID3 suitable for
 | |
|     development and debugging automatically to the application .pro file. However, to
 | |
|     distribute your application and get it Symbian Signed, you must apply for a UID
 | |
|     from Symbian Signed, which manages the allocation of UIDs. You can request UIDs either one
 | |
|     at a time or as preallocated blocks on the \l{https://www.symbiansigned.com/app/page}{Symbian Signed}
 | |
|     web site.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you use the Ovi Signed process, Ovi Publisher Support allocates the UID for you.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Replace the testing UID with the distribution UID in the .pro file before you
 | |
|     build the final installation package. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-platform-notes.html#unique-identifiers}{Unique Identifiers}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-deployment-maemo.html
 | |
|     \page creator-publish-ovi.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-remote-compiler.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Publishing Applications to Ovi Store
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To register as an Ovi Publisher, go to \l{https://publish.ovi.com/login}{Ovi Store}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     At the time of writing this document, Ovi Store accepts Qt
 | |
|     applications for the following Nokia device models:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Symbian^3: N8-00, E7-00, C7-00, C6-01
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Symbian^1 (S60 5th Edition): X6-00, N97, N97 mini, 5800 XpressMusic,
 | |
|         5530 XpressMusic, 5230 ExpressMusic, C6-00, 5228, 5235
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o S60 3rd Edition: E72, E71, E66, E63, E52
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Maemo: Nokia N900, with PR1.3 and later
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For an up-to-date list, see
 | |
|     \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/Distribute/Packaging_and_signing.xhtml}{Packaging and Signing}.
 | |
|     New devices are added to the list periodically. The final authority
 | |
|     on the supported devices is the Ovi Publish tool itself.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Publishing Qt Content for Symbian Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Ovi Signed process to get your application Express Signed for
 | |
|     free by Nokia. Make sure to use the \l{Application UID}{application UID} that you
 | |
|     receive from Ovi Publisher Support. Then create an unsigned SIS package and submit
 | |
|     it to Ovi Publishing for signing, quality assurance, packaging with Nokia Smart
 | |
|     Installer for Symbian, and publishing to Ovi Store.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about how to use Ovi Signed, see
 | |
|     \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/Distribute/Packaging_and_signing.xhtml}{Packaging and Signing}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If the application uses functions that require advanced
 | |
|     \l{Capabilities and Signing}{capabilities}, you must
 | |
|     use the standard Symbian Signed process to have the application Symbian Signed
 | |
|     (using the Certified Signed path or the manufacturer-specific channel).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note At the time of writing this document, the distribution of Qt 4.7.x based
 | |
|     applications is not supported by neither Ovi Store nor Smart Installer.
 | |
|     For up-to-date information about the packages available for distribution, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://wiki.forum.nokia.com/index.php/Nokia_Smart_Installer_for_Symbian}{Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian}
 | |
|     wiki.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a SIS package that you can submit to Ovi Publishing:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Make sure that the source directory is clean. For example, if you use git,
 | |
|         enter the following command:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \c {git clean -dfx}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Projects to edit the \gui {Build Settings} for the
 | |
|         \gui {Symbian Device} target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui Release configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Open the \gui {Run Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create SIS Package} step, select the \gui {Not signed} option.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Deploy SIS Package} step, click \gui {Remove Item} to
 | |
|         skip the step of copying the SIS file to a device. The SIS file is created
 | |
|         in the project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-remove-deploy-step.png "Removing deploy steps"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Check that the project .pro file uses the correct UID for the application and
 | |
|         the correct vendor information, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \code
 | |
|        symbian {
 | |
|             TARGET.UID3 = 0x2000D7D1
 | |
| 
 | |
|             vendorinfo = \
 | |
|             "%{\"CustomVendor-EN\"}" \
 | |
|             ":\"CustomVendor\""
 | |
| 
 | |
|             my_deployment.pkg_prerules = vendorinfo
 | |
|             DEPLOYMENT += my_deployment
 | |
|         }
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Ovi Store does not accept the application if the localized and non-localized
 | |
|         vendor information in the package file  do not match the publisher name. That is,
 | |
|         it cannot be \e Nokia, \e Vendor, or \e Vendor-EN.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Build > Run Project}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Submit the SIS file to Ovi Publishing as a Qt Content item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note After you change the application UID, you must use the developer
 | |
|     certificate-key pair that you receive from Ovi Publisher Support for testing
 | |
|     the application on devices. Self-signing cannot be
 | |
|     applied when UIDs from the trusted range 0x2xxxxxxx are used. For more
 | |
|     information, see \l{http://wiki.forum.nokia.com/index.php/UID}{UID}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Publishing Qt Content for Maemo Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The applications that you publish on Ovi Store, must meet the testing criteria
 | |
|     listed in
 | |
|     \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/info/sw.nokia.com/id/9cd1eb18-821b-4228-a0a3-36b049c5d608/Maemo_5_Application_OVI_Store_Entry_Requirements.pdf.html}
 | |
|     {Maemo 5 Applications: Ovi Store Entry Requirements}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Make sure that your application passes the following most commonly
 | |
|     failed test cases:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Package filename must include the application name and version
 | |
|         number using three digits. For example: myapplication_1_0_1.deb
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Application files must be installed to the opt folder on the ext3
 | |
|         partition.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Debian packages must be given the category user/hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Application cannot crash or hang during use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The application must handle different memory situations correctly.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You set the application name and installation folder in the
 | |
|     \gui {Run Settings} for the project. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}. Qt Creator specifies the correct
 | |
|     category settings by default when it creates the Debian directory and
 | |
|     the necessary files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can test the application on Qt Simulator and Maemo Emulator to make
 | |
|     sure that it does not crash or hang and to check how it handles different
 | |
|     memory situations. Before you submit the application to Ovi Publishing, you
 | |
|     must also fully test it on a Maemo device.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-run-settings.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-settings.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-build-dependencies.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Editor Settings
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To define the default file encoding, select the desired encoding in \gui Projects >
 | |
|     \gui{Editor Settings}. By default, the Qt Creator uses the file encoding
 | |
|     used by your system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-editor-settings.png "Editor Settings view"
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-settings.html
 | |
|     \page creator-build-dependencies.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Dependencies
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have multiple projects loaded in a session, you can define the
 | |
|     order in which they are built. For example, if project A depends on project
 | |
|     B, project B must be built first.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The build order is stored as a property of a session, not a project.
 | |
|     You must open the session for these settings to take effect. For more
 | |
|     information, see \l{Managing Sessions}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-dependencies.png "Dependencies view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To define the build order of projects within a session:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In \gui Projects, select a project.
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Dependencies.
 | |
|         \o Select projects that must be built before the current project is
 | |
|         built.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator calculates the build order based on the dependencies that you
 | |
|     specify for the projects loaded in the session.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note You cannot use this view to specify subprojects for projects.
 | |
|     For more information on how to add subprojects, see \l{Adding Subprojects
 | |
|     to Projects}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-quick-tour.html
 | |
|     \page creator-getting-started.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-build-example-application.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Getting Started
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section contains examples that illustrate how to use Qt Creator
 | |
|     to create, build, and run simple
 | |
|     applications:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \l{Building and Running an Example Application}
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating a Qt Widget Based Application}
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating a Mobile Application with Qt SDK}
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-writing-program.html
 | |
|     \page creator-mobile-example.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-qml-application.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Mobile Application with Qt SDK
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To complete this tutorial, you must install \QSDK.
 | |
|     The installation program installs and configures the necessary tool chains
 | |
|     for mobile application development.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator to create a small Qt
 | |
|     application, Battery Indicator, that uses the System Information
 | |
|     Mobility API to fetch battery information from the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-batteryindicator-screenshot.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating the Battery Indicator Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Create the project with the \gui{Help} mode active so that you can follow
 | |
|     these instructions while you work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Widget Project > Mobile
 | |
|         Qt
 | |
|         Application > Choose}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-new-mobile-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-intro-and-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {BatteryIndicator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
 | |
|         \c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Qt Versions} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-qt-versions.png "Qt Versions dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Maemo, \gui {Qt Simulator}, and \gui {Symbian Device} targets,
 | |
|         and click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Targets are listed if you installed the appropriate development
 | |
|         environment, for example, as part of the \QSDK. You can add targets
 | |
|         later in the \gui Projects mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Mobile Options} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-app-options.png "Mobile Options dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Orientation behavior} field, determine how the application
 | |
|         behaves when the orientation of the device display rotates between portrait
 | |
|         and landscape, and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note This dialog opens only if you select \gui Maemo5 or
 | |
|         \gui {Symbian Device} target in the \gui {Qt Versions} dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Symbian Specific} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-symbian-options.png "Symbian Specific dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Qt Creator contains a default program icon and generates an
 | |
|         \l{Application UID}, for testing the application on a device. You only
 | |
|         need to change the icon and UID if you deliver the application for public use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Next.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Maemo Specific} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-maemo-options.png "Maemo Specific dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Application icon (64x64)} field, select the application
 | |
|          icon to use on Maemo targets, or click \gui Next to use the default icon.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The BatteryIndicator project now contains the following files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o BatteryIndicator.pro
 | |
|         \o main.cpp
 | |
|         \o BatteryIndicator.svg
 | |
|         \o BatteryIndicator.png
 | |
|         \o BatteryIndicator.desktop
 | |
|         \o deployment.pri
 | |
|         \o mainwindow.cpp
 | |
|         \o mainwindow.ui
 | |
|         \o mainwindow.h
 | |
|         \o templates for Debian deployment files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-mobile-project-contents.png "Project contents"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The files come with the necessary boiler plate code that you must
 | |
|     modify, as described in the following sections.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Declaring the Qt Mobility API
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use the Qt Mobility APIs or develop applications for Symbian
 | |
|     devices, you must modify the .pro file to declare the Qt Mobility APIs
 | |
|     that you use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This example uses the System Info API, so you must declare it, as
 | |
|     illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     CONFIG += mobility
 | |
|     MOBILITY = systeminfo
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Each Mobility API has its corresponding value that you have to add
 | |
|     as a value of MOBILITY to use the API. For a list of the APIs and the
 | |
|     corresponding values that you can assign to MOBILITY, see the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qtmobility/quickstart.html}{Quickstart Example}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Designing the User Interface
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Editor} mode, double-click the mainwindow.ui
 | |
|         file in the \gui{Projects} view to launch the integrated \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui{Progress Bar} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qprogressbar.html}{QProgressBar})
 | |
|         widget to the form.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-widgets.png "Adding widgets to the UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Properties pane, change the \gui objectName to
 | |
|         \bold batteryLevelBar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Right-click the \gui MainWindow object and select
 | |
|         \gui {Lay Out > Lay Out Horizontally} to ensure that the battery
 | |
|         indicator widget size is adjusted correctly on Maemo devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Completing the Header File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The mainwindow.h file contains some of the necessary #includes, a
 | |
|     constructor, a destructor, and the \c{Ui} object. You must include
 | |
|     the System Info header file, add a shortcut to the mobility name
 | |
|     space, and add a private function to update the battery level value in
 | |
|     the indicator when the battery power level changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the \c{mainwindow.h} file
 | |
|         to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Include the System Info header file, as illustrated by the following
 | |
|         code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.h 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add a shortcut to the mobility name space, as illustrated by the
 | |
|         following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.h 2
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Declare a private function in the \c{private} section, after the
 | |
|         \c{Ui::MainWindow} function, as illustrated by the following code
 | |
|         snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.h 3
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Completing the Source File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that the header file is complete, move on to the source file,
 | |
|     mainwindow.cpp.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the mainwindow.cpp file
 | |
|         to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Create a QSystemDeviceInfo object and set its value. Then connect the signal
 | |
|         that indicates that battery level changed to the \c setValue
 | |
|         slot of the progress bar. This is illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.cpp 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Use the constructor to set initial values and make sure that the
 | |
|          created object is in a defined state, as illustrated by the following
 | |
|          code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.cpp 2
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Compiling and Running Your Program
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that you have all the necessary code, select \gui {Qt Simulator}
 | |
|     as the target and click the
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
 | |
|     button to build your program and run it in the Qt Simulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In Qt Simulator, run the runOutOfBattery.qs example script
 | |
|     to see the value change in the Battery Indicator application.
 | |
|     Select \gui {Scripting > examples > runOutOfBattery.qs > Run}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-mobile-simulated.png "Mobile example in Qt Simulator"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Testing on a Symbian Device
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You also need to test the application on real devices. Before you can
 | |
|     start testing on Symbian devices, you must connect them to the development
 | |
|     PC by using a USB cable and install the necessary software on them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Install Qt libraries, Qt mobile libraries, and the TRK
 | |
|         debugging application on the device. For more information,
 | |
|         see \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Start TRK on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select \gui {Symbian Device}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Run to build the application for the Symbian device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Testing on the Maemo Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
 | |
|     applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
 | |
|     on a Nokia N900 device with the software update release 1.3 (V20.2010.36-2).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-getting-started.html
 | |
|     \page creator-build-example-application.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-writing-program.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Building and Running an Example Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can test that your installation is successful by opening an existing
 | |
|     example application project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o On the \gui Welcome page, select \gui {Choose an Example...}
 | |
|         in the \gui {Explore Qt Quick Examples} field, and then select
 | |
|         \gui {Toys > Clocks}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-gs-build-example-open.png "Selecting an example"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select targets for the project. Select at least Qt Simulator
 | |
|         and one of the mobile targets, Maemo or Symbian Device, depending on
 | |
|         the device you develop for.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-gs-build-example-targets.png "Selecting targets"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note You can add targets later in the \gui Projects mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To test the application in Qt Simulator, click the \gui {Target
 | |
|         Selector} and select \gui {Qt Simulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image {qtcreator-gs-build-example-select-qs.png} "Selecting Qt Simulator as target"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click
 | |
|         \inlineimage{qtcreator-run.png}
 | |
|         to build the application and run it in Qt Simulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To see the compilation progress, press \key{Alt+4} to open the
 | |
|         \gui Compile Output pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui Build progress bar on the toolbar turns green when the project
 | |
|         is successfully built. The application opens in Qt Simulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image {qt-simulator.png} "Qt Simulator"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Change the settings in the
 | |
|         \gui View pane. For example, rotate the device by clicking the
 | |
|         \gui {Orientation} buttons or choose from the various Symbian and Maemo
 | |
|         configurations in the \gui {Device} field. You can also simulate various
 | |
|         mobile functions and create your own scripts.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To test the application on a Symbian device, install Qt libraries
 | |
|         and the TRK debugging application on the device. For more information,
 | |
|         see \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select \gui {Symbian Device}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Run to build the application and run it on the Symbian device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-mobile-example.html
 | |
|     \page creator-qml-application.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-managing.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Qt Quick Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To complete this tutorial, you must have Qt 4.7 or later installed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This tutorial uses basic elements and illustrates basic concepts of
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtquick.html}{Qt Quick}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This tutorial describes how to use the Qt Creator to implement the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/declarative-animation-states.html}
 | |
|     {states and transitions example application}. The example application displays a
 | |
|     Qt logo that moves between three rectangles on the page when you click them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-tutorial.png "States and transitions example"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating the Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick UI >
 | |
|         Choose}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Follow the instructions of the wizard to create a project called Transitions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator generates a default QML file that you can modify to create the main view
 | |
|     of the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-tutorial-project.png "Transitions project in Edit mode"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating the Main View
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The main view of the application displays a Qt logo in the top left corner of the
 | |
|     screen and two empty rectangles.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use the states.png image in your application, you must copy it to the project
 | |
|     directory from the examples directory in the
 | |
|     Qt installation directory. For example:
 | |
|     \c {C:\QtSDK\Examples\4.7\declarative\animation\states}. The image appears
 | |
|     in the \gui Resources pane. You can also use any other image or a QML element, instead.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Projects view, double-click the main .qml file (Transitions.qml)
 | |
|         to open it in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Design to open the file in \QMLD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-tutorial-desing-mode.png "Transitions project in Design Mode"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Navigator pane, select \gui Text and press \key Delete to delete it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Rectangle to edit its properties.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-tutorial-page.png "Page properties"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Id field, enter \e page, to be able to reference the rectangle
 | |
|             from other places.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Colors tab, \gui Rectangle field, set the color to #343434.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Library view, \gui Resources tab, select states.png and
 | |
|         drag and drop it to the canvas.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-tutorial-user-icon.png "Image properties"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Id field, enter \e icon.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Position field, set \gui X to 10 and \gui Y to 20.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Library view, \gui Items tab, select \gui Rectangle,
 | |
|          drag and drop it to the canvas, and edit its properties.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-tutorial-topleftrect.png "Rectangle properties"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Id field, enter \e topLeftRect.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Size field, set \gui W and \gui H to 64, for the rectangle size
 | |
|             to match the image size.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Colors tab, \gui Rectangle field, click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-transparent-button.png
 | |
|             button to make the rectangle transparent.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Border field, set the border color to #808080.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Rectangle tab, \gui Border field, set the border width to
 | |
|             1.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \note If the \gui Border field does not appear after you set the border
 | |
|             color, try setting the border color to solid by clicking the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-solid-color-button.png
 | |
|             button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Radius field, select 6 to create rounded corners for the
 | |
|             rectangle.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the top and left anchor buttons
 | |
|             to anchor the rectangle to the top left corner of the page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \image qmldesigner-tutorial-topleftrect-layout.png "Layout tab"
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Margin field, select 20 for the top anchor and 10 for
 | |
|             the left anchor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Navigator pane, drag and drop the \gui {Mouse Area} element from
 | |
|         \e page to \e topLeftRect to make it apply only to the rectangle and not to the whole
 | |
|         page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Edit \gui {Mouse Area} properties:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|             button to anchor the mouse area to the rectangle.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the code editor, edit the pointer to the clicked expression in the mouse
 | |
|             area element, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \qml
 | |
|             MouseArea {
 | |
|                 anchors.fill: parent
 | |
|                 onClicked: page.state = ''
 | |
|             }
 | |
|             \endqml
 | |
| 
 | |
|             The expression sets the state to the base state and returns the image to
 | |
|             its initial position.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui Navigator pane, copy topLeftRect (by pressing \key {Ctrl+C}) and
 | |
|     paste it to the canvas twice
 | |
|     (by pressing \key {Ctrl+V}). Qt Creator renames the new instances of the element
 | |
|     topLeftRect1 and topLeftRect2.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Select topLeftRect1 and edit its properties:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Id field, enter \e middleRightRect.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In \gui {Layout}, select the right and vertical center anchor buttons to
 | |
|             anchor the rectangle to the middle right margin of the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Margin field, select 10 for the right anchor and 0 for
 | |
|             the vertical center anchor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the code editor,add a pointer to a clicked expression to the
 | |
|             mouse area element. The following expression sets the state to \e State1:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \c {onClicked: page.state = 'State1'}
 | |
| 
 | |
|             You will create State1 later.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Select topLeftRect2 and edit its properties:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Id field, enter \e bottomLeftRect.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In \gui {Layout}, select the bottom and left anchor buttons to
 | |
|             anchor the rectangle to the bottom left margin of the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Margin field, select 20 for the bottom anchor and 10 for
 | |
|             the left anchor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the code editor, add a pointer to a clicked expression to the
 | |
|             mouse area element. The following expression sets the state to \e State2:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \c {onClicked: page.state = 'State2'}
 | |
| 
 | |
|             You will create State2 later.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Press \key {Ctrl+S} to save the changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-tutorial.png "States and transitions example"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You should see the Qt logo in the top left rectangle, and two additional
 | |
|     rectangles in the center right and bottom left of the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can now create additional states to add views to the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding Views
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the .qml file, you already created pointers to two additional states:
 | |
|     State1 and State2. To create the states:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the empty slot in the \gui States pane to create State1.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the empty slot in the \gui States pane to create State2.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the code editor, bind the position of the Qt logo to the rectangle
 | |
|         to make sure that the logo is displayed within the rectangle when the view
 | |
|         is scaled on different sizes of screens. Set expressions for the x and y
 | |
|         properties, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet snippets/qml/states-properties.qml states
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-tutorial-state1.png "States"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note When you set the expressions, drag and drop is disabled for
 | |
|         the icon in \QMLD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Click the rectangles to move the Qt logo from one rectangle to another.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding Animation to the View
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Add transitions to define how the properties change when the Qt logo moves
 | |
|     between states. The transitions apply animations to the Qt logo. For example,
 | |
|     the Qt logo bounces back when it moves to the middleRightRect and eases into
 | |
|     bottomLeftRect. Add the transitions in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the code editor, add the following code to specify that when moving to
 | |
|         State1, the x and y coordinates of the Qt logo change linearly over a duration
 | |
|         of 1 second:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet snippets/qml/list-of-transitions.qml first transition
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o You can use the Qt Quick toolbar for animation to change the easing curve
 | |
|         type from linear to OutBounce:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui NumberAnimation in the code editor to display the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qml-toolbar-indicator.png
 | |
|             icon, and then click the icon to open the toolbar:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \image qmldesigner-tutorial-quick-toolbar.png "Qt Quick toolbar for animation"
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Easing field, select \gui Bounce.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Subtype field, select \gui Out.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add the following code to specify that when moving to State2, the x and y
 | |
|         coordinates of the Qt logo change over a duration of 2 seconds,
 | |
|         and an InOutQuad easing function is used:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet snippets/qml/list-of-transitions.qml second transition
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add the following code to specify that for any other state changes, the x
 | |
|         and y coordinates of the Qt logo change linearly over a duration of 200
 | |
|         milliseconds:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet snippets/qml/list-of-transitions.qml default transition
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Click the rectangles to view the animated transitions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Deploying the Application to Mobile Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To deploy the application to mobile devices, use the \gui {Qt Quick Application} wizard
 | |
|     to convert it into a Qt Quick application. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Importing QML Applications}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-build-example-application.html
 | |
|     \page creator-writing-program.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-mobile-example.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Qt Widget Based Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator
 | |
|     to create a small Qt application, Text Finder. It is a simplified version of the
 | |
|     QtUiTools \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/uitools-textfinder.html}{Text Finder}
 | |
|     example.
 | |
|     The application user interface is constructed from Qt widgets by using \QD.
 | |
|     The application logic is written in C++ by using the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-screenshot.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating the Text Finder Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Create the project with two instances of Qt Creator open and the \gui{Help} mode
 | |
|     active in one of them so that you can follow
 | |
|     these instructions while you work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Widget Project > Qt Gui
 | |
|         Application > Choose}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-new-qt-gui-application.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-intro-and-location-qt-gui.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {TextFinder}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
 | |
|         \c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Qt Versions} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-new-project-qt-versions-qt-gui.png "Qt Versions dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the Qt versions to use as build targets for your project, and click
 | |
|         \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note If you have only one Qt version installed, this dialog is skipped.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Class Information} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-class-info-qt-gui.png "Class Information dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Class name} field, type \bold {TextFinder} as the class name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Base class} list, select \bold {QWidget} as the base class type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note The \gui{Header file}, \gui{Source file} and
 | |
|            \gui{Form file} fields are automatically updated to match the name of the
 | |
|            class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-new-project-summary-qt-gui.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The TextFinder project now contains the following files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o textfinder.h
 | |
|         \o textfinder.cpp
 | |
|         \o main.cpp
 | |
|         \o textfinder.ui
 | |
|         \o textfinder.pro
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-contents.png "TextFinder project contents"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The .h and .cpp files come with the necessary boiler plate code.
 | |
|     The .pro file is complete.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Filling in the Missing Pieces
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Begin by designing the user interface and then move on to filling
 | |
|     in the missing code. Finally, add the find functionality.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Designing the User Interface
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui{Editor} mode, double-click the textfinder.ui file in the \gui{Projects}
 | |
|     view to launch the integrated \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Drag and drop the following widgets to the form:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|     \o \gui{Label} (QLabel)
 | |
|     \o \gui{Line Edit} (QLineEdit)
 | |
|     \o \gui{Push Button} (QPushButton)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-ui-widgets.png "Adding widgets to Text Finder UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To easily locate the widgets, use the search box at the top of the
 | |
|     \gui Sidebar. For example, to find the \gui Label widget, start typing
 | |
|     the word \bold label.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-texfinder-filter.png "Filter field"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Double-click the \gui{Label} widget and enter the text \bold{Keyword}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Double-click the \gui{Push Button} widget and enter the text \bold{Find}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui Properties pane, change the \gui objectName to \bold findButton.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-objectname.png "Changing object names"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Press \key {Ctrl+A} to select the widgets and click \gui{Lay out Horizontally}
 | |
|     (or press \gui{Ctrl+H}) to apply a horizontal layout
 | |
|     (QHBoxLayout).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-texfinder-ui-horizontal-layout.png "Applying horizontal layout"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Drag and drop a \gui{Text Edit} widget (QTextEdit)
 | |
|     to the form.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Select the screen area and click \gui{Lay out Vertically} (or press \gui{Ctrl+L})
 | |
|     to apply a vertical layout (QVBoxLayout).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Applying the horizontal and vertical layouts ensures that the application UI scales to different
 | |
|     screen sizes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o To call a find function when users press the \gui Find button, you use the Qt signals
 | |
|     and slots mechanism. A signal is emitted when a particular event occurs and a slot is
 | |
|     a function that is called in response to a particular signal. Qt widgets have predefined
 | |
|     signals and slots that you can use directly from \QD. To add a slot for the find function:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Right-click the \gui Find button to open a context-menu.
 | |
|             \o Select \gui {Go to Slot > clicked()}, and then select \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             A private slot, \c{on_findButton_clicked()}, is added to the header file,
 | |
|             textfinder.h and a private function, \c{TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()},
 | |
|             is added to the source file, textfinder.cpp.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Press \gui{Ctrl+S} to save your changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about designing forms with \QD, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Completing the Header File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The textfinder.h file already has the necessary #includes, a
 | |
|     constructor, a destructor, and the \c{Ui} object. You need to add a private
 | |
|     function, \c{loadTextFile()}, to read and display the
 | |
|     contents of the input text file in the
 | |
|     QTextEdit.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui{Projects} pane in the \gui {Edit view}, double-click the \c{textfinder.h} file
 | |
|     to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Add a private function
 | |
|     to the \c{private} section, after the \c{Ui::TextFinder} pointer, as
 | |
|     illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.h 0
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Completing the Source File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that the header file is complete, move on to the source file,
 | |
|    textfinder.cpp.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui{Projects} pane in the \gui Edit view, double-click the textfinder.cpp file
 | |
|     to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Add code to load a text file using
 | |
|     QFile, read it with QTextStream, and
 | |
|     then display it on \c{textEdit} with
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}.
 | |
|     This is illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 0
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o To use QFile and QTextStream, add the
 | |
|     following #includes to textfinder.cpp:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o For the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot, add code to extract the search string and
 | |
|     use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtextedit.html#find}{find()} function
 | |
|     to look for the search string within the text file. This is illustrated by
 | |
|     the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 2
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Once both of these functions are complete, add a line to call \c{loadTextFile()} in
 | |
|     the constructor, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 3
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot is called automatically in
 | |
|     the uic generated ui_textfinder.h file by this line of code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     QMetaObject::connectSlotsByName(TextFinder);
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating a Resource File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You need a resource file (.qrc) within which you embed the input
 | |
|     text file. The input file can be any .txt file with a paragraph of text.
 | |
|     Create a text file called input.txt and store it in the textfinder
 | |
|     folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a resource file:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt Resource File > Choose}.
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Choose the Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard2.png "Choose the Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Name} field, enter \bold{textfinder}.
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Path} field, enter \c{C:\Qt\examples\TextFinder},
 | |
|         and click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard3.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Add to project} field, select \bold{TextFinder.pro}
 | |
|         and click \gui{Finish} to open the file in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Add > Add Prefix}.
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Prefix} field, replace the default prefix with a slash (/).
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Add > Add Files}, to locate and add input.txt.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-add-resource.png "Editing resource files"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Compiling and Running Your Program
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that you have all the necessary files, click the \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
 | |
|     button to compile and run your program.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-remote-compiler.html
 | |
|     \page creator-version-control.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-task-lists.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using Version Control Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Version control systems supported by Qt Creator are:
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \i \bold{Version Control System}
 | |
|             \i \bold{Address}
 | |
|             \i \bold{Notes}
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Git}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://git-scm.com/}
 | |
|             \i
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Subversion}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://subversion.tigris.org/}
 | |
|             \i
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Perforce}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://www.perforce.com}
 | |
|             \i  Server version 2006.1 and later
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{CVS}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://www.cvshome.org}
 | |
|             \i
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Mercurial}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://mercurial.selenic.com/}
 | |
|             \i  Qt Creator 2.0 and later
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up Version Control Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator uses the version control system's command line clients to access
 | |
|     your repositories. To allow access, make sure that the command line clients
 | |
|     can be located using the \c{PATH} environment variable or specify the path to
 | |
|     the command line client executables in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui {Version Control}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     After you set up the version control system, use the command line to check
 | |
|     that everything works (for example, use the status command). If no issues arise,
 | |
|     you should be ready to use the system also from Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using msysGit on Windows
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you configure Git for use with \c {git bash}, only, and use SSH
 | |
|     authorization, Git looks for the SSH keys in the directory where the
 | |
|     \c HOME environment points to. The variable is always set by \c {git bash}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     However, the variable is typically not set in a Windows command prompt.
 | |
|     When you run Git from a Windows command prompt, it looks for the SSH keys in its
 | |
|     installation directory, and therefore, the authorization fails.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can set the \c HOME environment variable from Qt Creator. Select \gui {Tools >
 | |
|     Options... > Version Control > Git}. Select the \gui {Environment Variables}
 | |
|     and the \gui {Set "HOME" environment variable} check boxes. \c HOME is set to
 | |
|     \c %HOMEDRIVE%%HOMEPATH% when the Git executable is run and authorization works
 | |
|     as it would with \c {git bash}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up Common Options
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Version Control} > \gui{Common}
 | |
|     to specify settings for submit messages:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o   \gui{Submit message check script} is a script or program that
 | |
|              can be used to perform checks on the submit message before
 | |
|              submitting. The submit message is passed in as the script's first
 | |
|              parameter. If there is an error, the script should output a
 | |
|              message on standard error and return a non-zero exit code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o    \gui{User/alias configuration file} takes a file in mailmap format
 | |
|              that lists user names and aliases. For example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \code
 | |
|              Jon Doe <Jon.Doe@company.com>
 | |
|              Hans Mustermann <Hans.Mustermann@company.com> hm <info@company.com>
 | |
|              \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \note The second line above specifies the alias \e{hm} and the
 | |
|              corresponding email address for \e{Hans Mustermann}. If the
 | |
|              user/alias configuration file is present, the submit editor
 | |
|              displays a context menu with \gui{Insert name...} that pops up a
 | |
|              dialog letting the user select a name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o    \gui{User fields configuration file} is a simple text file
 | |
|              consisting of lines specifying submit message fields that take
 | |
|              user names, for example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \code
 | |
|              Reviewed-by:
 | |
|              Signed-off-by:
 | |
|              \endcode
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The fields above appear below the submit message. They provide completion
 | |
|     for the aliases/public user names specified in the
 | |
|     \e{User/alias configuration file} as well as a button that opens the
 | |
|     aforementioned user name dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating VCS Repositories for New Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows for creating VCS repositories for version
 | |
|     control systems that support local repository creation, such as
 | |
|     Git or Mercurial.
 | |
|     When creating a new project by selecting \gui File >
 | |
|     \gui{New File or Project...}, you can choose a version
 | |
|     control system in the final wizard page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Version Control Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Tools} menu contains a submenu for each supported version
 | |
|     control system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Version Control} output pane displays the commands
 | |
|     that are executed, a timestamp, and the relevant output.
 | |
|     Select \gui {Window > Output Panes > Version Control} to open
 | |
|     the pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-pane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Adding Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you create a new file or a new project, the wizard displays a page
 | |
|     asking whether the files should be added to a version control system.
 | |
|     This happens when the parent directory or the project is already
 | |
|     under version control and the system supports the concept of adding files,
 | |
|     for example, Perforce and Subversion. Alternatively, you can
 | |
|     add files later by using the version control tool menus.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     With Git, there is no concept of adding files. Instead, all modified
 | |
|     files must be staged for a commit.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Diff Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     All version control systems provide menu options to \e{diff} the current
 | |
|     file or project: to compare it with the latest version stored in the
 | |
|     repository and to display the differences. In Qt Creator, a diff is
 | |
|     displayed in a read-only editor. If the file is accessible, you can
 | |
|     double-click on a selected diff chunk and Qt Creator opens an editor
 | |
|     displaying the file, scrolled to the line in question.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-diff.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Versioning History and Change Details
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Display the versioning history of a file by selecting \gui{Log}
 | |
|     (for Git and Mercurial) or \gui{Filelog} (for CVS, Perforce, and
 | |
|     Subversion). Typically, the log output contains the date, the commit
 | |
|     message, and a change or revision identifier. Click on the identifier to
 | |
|     display a description of the change including the diff.
 | |
|     Right-clicking on an identifier brings up a context menu that lets you
 | |
|     show annotation views of previous versions (see \l{Annotating Files}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-log.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Annotating Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Annotation views are obtained by selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame}.
 | |
|     Selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame} displays the lines of the file
 | |
|     prepended by the change identifier they originate from. Clicking on the
 | |
|     change identifier shows a detailed description of the change.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To show the annotation of a previous version, right-click on the
 | |
|     version identifier at the beginning of a line and choose one of the
 | |
|     revisions shown at the bottom of the context menu. This allows you to
 | |
|     navigate through the history of the file and obtain previous versions of
 | |
|     it. It also works for Git and Mercurial using SHA's.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The same context menu is available when right-clicking on a version
 | |
|     identifier in the file log view of a single file.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Committing Changes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Once you have finished making changes, submit them to the version control
 | |
|     system by choosing \gui{Commit} or \gui{Submit}. Qt Creator displays a
 | |
|     commit page containing a text editor where you can enter your commit
 | |
|     message and a checkable list of modified files to be included.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-commit.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you have finished filling out the commit page information, click on
 | |
|     \gui{Commit} to start committing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Diff Selected Files} button brings up a diff view of the
 | |
|     files selected in the file list. Since the commit page is just another
 | |
|     editor, you can go back to it by closing the diff view. You can also check
 | |
|     a diff view from the editor combo box showing the \gui{Opened files}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Reverting Changes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     All supported version control system support reverting your project to
 | |
|     known states. This functionality is generally called \e reverting.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The changes discarded depend on the version control system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A version control system can replace the \gui Revert menu option with other
 | |
|     options.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Reverting Changes Using Git
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Git version control system has an index that is used to stage
 | |
|     changes. The index is commited on the next commit. Git allows you to revert
 | |
|     back to the state of the last commit as well as to the state staged in the
 | |
|     index.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{Undo Unstaged Changes} reverts all changes and resets the working
 | |
|         directory to the state of the index.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{Undo Uncommitted Changes} reverts all changes, discarding the index.
 | |
|         This returns your working copy to the state it was in right after the last commit.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Git Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Git is a fast decentralized version control system. Git is available
 | |
|     for Windows, Linux and Mac.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Git submenu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui {Patch > Apply from Editor/Apply from File...}
 | |
|             \i  Patches are rewriting instructions that can be applied to a set of files.
 | |
|                 You can either apply a patch file that is open in Qt Creator or select
 | |
|                 the patch file to apply from the file system.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Pull}
 | |
|             \i  Pull changes from the remote repository. If there are locally
 | |
|                 modified files, you are prompted to stash those changes. Select \gui{Tools >
 | |
|                 Options... > Version Control > Git} and select the \gui {Pull with rebase}
 | |
|                 check box to perform a rebase operation while pulling.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Clean.../Clean Project...}
 | |
|             \i  All files that are not under version control (with the exception
 | |
|                 of patches and project files) are displayed in the \gui {Clean Repository}
 | |
|                 dialog. Select the files to delete and click \gui Delete. This allows you to
 | |
|                 clean a build completely.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Branches...}
 | |
|             \i  Display the \gui Branch dialog that shows the local branches at the
 | |
|                 top and remote branches at the bottom. To switch to a local branch,
 | |
|                 double-click it. Double-clicking on a remote branch first creates a local
 | |
|                 branch with the same name that tracks the remote branch, and then switches
 | |
|                 to it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \image qtcreator-vcs-gitbranch.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui {Stage File for Commit}
 | |
|             \i  Mark new or modified files for committing to the repository.
 | |
|                 To undo this function, select \gui {Unstage File from Commit}.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Show Commit...}
 | |
|             \i  Select a commit to view. Enter the SHA of the commit
 | |
|                 in the \gui Change field.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Using Stashes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     With Git, you can put your current set of changes onto a virtual shelf called a \e stash.
 | |
|     Stashes are useful, for example, to put aside a set of changes to work on higher
 | |
|     priority tasks or to pull in new chages from another repository.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator exposes this functionality in the \gui{Tools > Git > Stash} menu.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stashes...}
 | |
|             \i  Display a dialog that shows all known stashes with options to restore,
 | |
|                 display or delete them.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stash}
 | |
|             \i  Stash all local changes. The working copy is then reset to
 | |
|                 the state it had right after the last commit.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stash Snapshot...}
 | |
|             \i  Save a snapshot of your current work under a name for later reference. The
 | |
|                 working copy is unchanged.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 For example, if you want to try something and find out later that it does not work,
 | |
|                 you can discard it and return to the state of the snapshot.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stash Pop}
 | |
|             \i  Remove a single stashed state from the stash list and apply it on
 | |
|                 top of the current working tree state.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Mercurial Functionality
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Mercurial submenu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Import}
 | |
|             \i  Apply changes from a patch file.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Incoming}
 | |
|             \i  Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
 | |
|                 the changes that will be pulled.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Outgoing}
 | |
|             \i  Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
 | |
|                 the changes that will be pushed.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Pull}
 | |
|             \i  Pull changes from the remote repository.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Update}
 | |
|             \i  Look at an earlier version of the code.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Perforce Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you start Qt Creator, it looks for the executable specified
 | |
|     in the \gui{P4 command} field in \gui{Tools > Options... > Version
 | |
|     Control > Perforce}. If the file is not found, the following error
 | |
|     message is displayed in the \gui {Version Control} output pane:
 | |
|     \gui {Perforce: Unable to determine the repository: "p4.exe"
 | |
|     terminated with exit code 1}. If you use Perforce, check that the
 | |
|     path to the executable is specified correctly in the \gui{P4 command}
 | |
|     field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you do not use Perforce, you can disable the Perforce plugin to
 | |
|     get rid of the error message. Choose \gui {Help > About Plugins} and
 | |
|     deselect the \gui Load check box for the \gui Perforce plugin in the
 | |
|     \gui {Version Control} group.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Perforce submenu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Describe...}
 | |
|             \i  View information about changelists and the files in them.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Edit File}
 | |
|             \i  Open a file for editing.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Opened}
 | |
|             \i  List files that are open for editing.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Pending Changes...}
 | |
|             \i  Group files for commit.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Update All/Update Current Project}
 | |
|             \i  Fetch the current version of the current project or all
 | |
|             projects from the repository.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Subversion Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Subversion submenu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Describe...}
 | |
|             \i  Display commit log messages for a revision.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Update Project/Update Repository}
 | |
|             \i  Update your working copy.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage qt-quick-toolbars.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-locator.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-codepasting.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Searching With the Locator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The locator provides one of the easiest ways in Qt Creator to browse
 | |
|     through projects, files, classes, methods, documentation and file systems.
 | |
|     You can find the locator in the bottom left of the Qt Creator window.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To activate the locator, press \key Ctrl+K (\key Cmd+K on Mac OS
 | |
|     X) or select \gui Tools > \gui Locate....
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-locator.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To edit the currently open project's main.cpp file using the locator:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Activate the locator by pressing \key Ctrl+K.
 | |
|         \o Enter \tt{main.cpp}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-locator-open.png
 | |
|         \o Press \key Return.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            The main.cpp file opens in the editor.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     It is also possible to enter only a part of a search string.
 | |
|     As you type, the locator shows the occurrences of that string regardless
 | |
|     of where in the name of an component it appears.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To narrow down the search results, you can use the following wildcard
 | |
|     characters:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To match any number of any or no characters, enter \bold{*}.
 | |
|         \o To match a single instance of any character, enter \bold{?}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using the Locator Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The locator allows you to browse not only files, but any items
 | |
|     defined by \bold{locator filters}. By default, the locator contains
 | |
|     filters which locate:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o  Any open document
 | |
|         \o  Files anywhere on your file system
 | |
|         \o  Files belonging to your project, such as source, header resource,
 | |
|             and .ui files
 | |
|         \o  Class and method definitions in your project or anywhere referenced
 | |
|             from your project
 | |
|         \o  Class and method definitions in the current document
 | |
|         \o  Help topics, including Qt documentation
 | |
|         \o  Specific line in the document displayed in your editor
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use a specific locator filter, type the assigned prefix followed by
 | |
|     \key Space. The prefix is usually a single character.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, to locate symbols matching
 | |
|     QDataStream:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Activate the locator.
 | |
|         \o Enter \tt{\bold{: QDataStream}} (: (colon) followed by a
 | |
|            \key Space and the symbol name (QDataStream)).
 | |
| 
 | |
|            The locator lists the results.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-navigate-popup.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default the following filters are enabled and you do not need to use
 | |
|     their prefixes explicitly:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Going to a line in the current file (l).
 | |
|         \o Going to an open file (o).
 | |
|         \o Going to a file in any open project (a).
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using the Default Locator Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following locator filters are available by default:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o  Function
 | |
|             \o  Enter in locator
 | |
|             \o  Example
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a line in the current file.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{l \e{Line number}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-line.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a symbol definition.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{: \e{Symbol name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-symbols.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a symbol definition in the current file.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{. \e{Symbol name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-method-list.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a help topic.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{? \e{Help topic}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-help.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to an open file.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{o \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-opendocs.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a file in the file system (browse the file system).
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{f \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-filesystem.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a file in any project currently open.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{a \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-files.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a file in the current project.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{p \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-current-project.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a class definition.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{c \e{Class name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-classes.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a method definition.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{m \e{Method name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-methods.png
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Locator Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To quickly access files not directly mentioned in your project, you can
 | |
|     create your own locator filters. That way you can locate files in a
 | |
|     directory structure you have defined.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a locator filter:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In the locator, click \inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
 | |
|            and select \gui Configure.... to open the \gui Locator options.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-locator-customize.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Add.
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Filter Configuration} dialog:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o Name your filter.
 | |
|             \o Select at least one directory. The locator searches directories
 | |
|                recursively.
 | |
|             \o Define the file pattern as a comma separated list. For example,
 | |
|                to search all .h and .cpp files, enter \bold{*.h,*.cpp}
 | |
|             \o Specify the prefix string.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                To show only results matching this filter, select
 | |
|                \gui{Limit to prefix}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \image qtcreator-navigate-customfilter.png
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|         \o Click OK.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Configuring the Locator Cache
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The locator searches the files matching your file pattern in the
 | |
|     directories you have selected and caches that information. The cache for
 | |
|     all default filters is updated as you write your code. By default,
 | |
|     Qt Creator updates the filters created by you once an hour.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To update the cached information manually, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
 | |
|     and select \gui Refresh.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To set a new cache update time:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Locator.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{Refresh interval}, define new time in minutes.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-managing-sessions.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-wizards.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Managing Sessions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you exit Qt Creator, a snapshot of your current workspace is stored
 | |
|     as a \e session. A session is an arbitrary collection of:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Open projects with their dependencies (including SUBDIRS projects)
 | |
|         \o Open editors
 | |
|         \o Breakpoints and watches
 | |
|         \o Bookmarks
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A session is  personal, that is, not meant to be shared. It is not
 | |
|     supposed to reflect the project structure. It contains personal data, such as
 | |
|     bookmarks and breakpoints that are usually not of interest to other developers
 | |
|     working on the same projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, if you work on a project and need to switch to another project for a
 | |
|     while, you can save your workspace as a session. This makes it easier
 | |
|     to return to working on the first project later.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a new session or remove existing sessions, select \gui File >
 | |
|     \gui Sessions > \gui{Session Manager}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-session-manager.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To switch between sessions, choose
 | |
|     \gui File > \gui Session. If you do not create or select a session,
 | |
|     Qt Creator always uses the default session, which was created the
 | |
|     last time you exited Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you launch Qt Creator, a list of existing sessions is displayed on the
 | |
|     \gui{Welcome screen}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-welcome-session.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-build-dependencies.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging-example.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugging
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides a debugger plugin that acts
 | |
|     as an interface between the Qt Creator core and external native debuggers
 | |
|     such as the GNU Symbolic Debugger (gdb), the Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB),
 | |
|     and a QML/JavaScript debugger.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following sections describe debugging with Qt Creator:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Debugging the Example Application} uses an example application to illustrate
 | |
|         how to debug Qt C++ applications in the \gui Debug mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Interacting with the Debugger} describes the views and functions available
 | |
|         in the \gui Debug mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Setting Up Debugger} summarizes the support for debugging C++ code and
 | |
|         requirements for installation. Typically, the interaction between Qt Creator
 | |
|         and the native debugger is set up automatically and you do not need to do anything.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Debugger Modes of Operation} describes the operating modes in which the
 | |
|         debugger plugin runs, depending on where and how the process is started and run.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Using Debugging Helpers} describes how to get more detailed data
 | |
|         on complex data.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Debugging Qt Quick Projects} describes how to debug Qt Quick projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugger-engines.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugger-operating-modes.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging-helpers.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugger Modes of Operation
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugger plugin runs in different operating modes depending on where and
 | |
|     how the process is started and run. Some of the modes are only available for
 | |
|     a particular operating system or platform.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can launch the debugger in the following modes:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Plain to debug locally started applications, such as a
 | |
|         Qt based GUI application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Terminal to debug locally started processes that need a
 | |
|        console, typically without a GUI.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Attach to debug local processes started outside Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Remote to debug a process running on a different machine.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Core to debug crashed processes on Unix.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Post-mortem to debug crashed processes on Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold TRK to debug processes running on a Symbian device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Debugging QML and JavaScript is supported only in plain mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you click the \gui {Start Debugging} button, the debugger is launched
 | |
|     in the appropriate operating mode (plain, terminal, or TRK), based on the
 | |
|     build and run settings for the active project. Select \gui Debug menu options
 | |
|     to launch the debugger in the other modes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Plain Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the plain mode, click the \gui {Start Debugging}
 | |
|     button for the active project, or choose
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Debug External Application...}
 | |
|     and specify an executable.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Terminal Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the terminal mode, select \gui {Projects > Run Settings}
 | |
|     and select the \gui {Run in terminal} check box. Then click the
 | |
|     \gui {Start Debugging} button for the active project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Attach Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the attach mode, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging >  Attach to Running External Application...},
 | |
|     and then select a process by its name or process ID to attach to.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Remote Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The remote mode uses a \e{gdbserver} daemon that runs on the remote machine.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the remote mode, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Attach to Remote Application...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Core Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The core mode it used to debug \e {core} files (crash dumps) that are
 | |
|     generated from crashed processes if the system is set up to allow this.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable the dumping of core files on a Unix system enter the following
 | |
|     command in the shell from which the application will be launched:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     ulimit -c unlimited
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the core mode, select
 | |
|     \gui{Debug > Start Debugging >  Attach to Core...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Post-Mortem Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The post-mortem mode is available only on Windows, if you have installed
 | |
|     the debugging tools for Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Qt Creator installation program asks you whether you want to
 | |
|     register Qt Creator as a post-mortem debugger. To change the setting, select
 | |
|     \gui{Tools > Options...  > Debugger > Common > Use Creator for post-mortem debugging}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can launch the debugger in the post-mortem mode if an application crashes
 | |
|     on Windows. Click the \gui {Debug in Qt Creator} button in the error message
 | |
|     that is displayed by the Windows operating system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 TRK Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The TRK mode is a special mode available only for Symbian. It
 | |
|     debugs processes running on a Symbian
 | |
|     device using the App TRK application that runs on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the TRK mode, open the project, select Symbian as the
 | |
|     target, and click the \gui {Start Debugging} button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on setting up Symbian projects, see
 | |
|     \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debug-mode.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugger-engines.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugger-operating-modes.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up Debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The information in this section applies only to debugging the C++
 | |
|     language.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Typically, the interaction between Qt Creator and the native debugger is set
 | |
|     up automatically and you do not need to do anything. However, you might have an
 | |
|     unsupported gdb version installed, your Linux environment might not have gdb
 | |
|     installed at all, or you might want to use the debugging tools for Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To use the debugging tools for Windows, you must install them and add the
 | |
|     Symbol Server provided by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger.
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section explains the
 | |
|     options you have for debugging C++ code and provides installation notes for the
 | |
|     supported native debuggers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Supported Native Debugger Versions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugger plugin supports different builds of the gdb debugger, both
 | |
|     with and without the ability to use Python scripting. The Python enabled
 | |
|     versions are preferred, but they are not available on Mac and on older
 | |
|     versions of Linux.
 | |
|     On Windows, Symbian, and Maemo, only the Python version is supported.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The non-Python versions use the compiled version of the debugging helpers,
 | |
|     that you must enable separately. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Debugging Helpers Based on C++}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Python version uses a script version of the debugging helpers
 | |
|     that does not need any special setup.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The CDB native debugger has similar funtionality to the non-Python gdb debugger
 | |
|     engine. Specifically, it also uses compiled C++ code for the debugging
 | |
|     helper library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes the support for debugging C++ code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Platform
 | |
|             \o Compiler
 | |
|             \o Native Debugger
 | |
|             \o Python
 | |
|             \o Debugger Modes
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Linux
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Remote, Core
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Unix
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Remote, Core
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Mac OS
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o No
 | |
|             \o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Core
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Windows/MinGW
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Remote, Core
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Windows/MSVC
 | |
|             \o Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler
 | |
|             \o Debugging Tools for Windows/CDB
 | |
|             \o Not applicable
 | |
|             \o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Post-Mortem
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Symbian
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o TRK
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Maemo
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Remote
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on the debugger modes, see \l{Debugger Modes of Operation}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \omit
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Gdb Adapter Modes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     [Advanced Topic]
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The gdb native debugger used internally by the debugger plugin runs in
 | |
|     different adapter modes to cope with the variety
 | |
|     of supported platforms and environments. All gdb adapters inherit from
 | |
|     AbstractGdbAdapter:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o PlainGdbAdapter debugs locally started GUI processes.
 | |
|        It is physically split into parts that are relevant only when Python is
 | |
|        available, parts relevant only when Python is not available, and mixed code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o TermGdbAdapter debugs locally started processes that need a
 | |
|        console.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o AttachGdbAdapter debugs local processes started outside Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o CoreGdbAdapter debugs core files generated from crashes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o RemoteGdbAdapter interacts with the gdbserver running on Linux.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o TrkGdbAdapter interacts with Symbian devices. The gdb protocol and
 | |
|        the gdb serial protocol are used between gdb and the adapter. The TRK
 | |
|        protocol is used between the adapter and AppTRK running on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \endomit
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Installing Native Debuggers
 | |
| 
 | |
|     There are various reasons why the debugger plugin may fail to automatically
 | |
|     pick up a suitable native debugger. The native debugger might be missing
 | |
|     (which is usually the case for the CDB debugger on Windows which always
 | |
|     needs to be installed manually by the user) or the installed version is not
 | |
|     supported.
 | |
|     Check the table below for the supported versions and other important
 | |
|     information about installing native debuggers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Native Debugger
 | |
|             \o Notes
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Gdb
 | |
|             \o On Linux, install version 7.0.1, 7.1, or preferably, 7.2 or
 | |
|                later. On Mac OS X, install Apple gdb version 6.3.50-20050815
 | |
|             (build 1344) or later.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Debugging tools for Windows
 | |
|             \o Using this engine requires you to install the
 | |
|                \e{Debugging tools for Windows}
 | |
|                \l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/installx86.Mspx}{32-bit}
 | |
|                or
 | |
|                \l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/install64bit.Mspx}{64-bit}
 | |
|                package (Version 6.11.1.404 for the 32-bit or the 64-bit version
 | |
|                of Qt Creator, respectively),
 | |
|                which is freely available for download from the
 | |
|                \l{http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/default.aspx}
 | |
| 
 | |
|                {Microsoft Developer Network}. The Qt Creator help browser does
 | |
|                not allow you to download files, and therefore, you must copy
 | |
|                the above links to a browser.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \note Visual Studio does not include the Debugging tools needed,
 | |
|                and therefore, you must install them separately.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                The pre-built \QSDK for Windows makes use of the library if it
 | |
|                is present on the system. When manually building Qt Creator using
 | |
|                the Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler, the build process checks for the
 | |
|                required files in \c{"%ProgramFiles%\Debugging Tools for Windows"}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                It is highly recommended that you add the Symbol Server provided
 | |
|                by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger. The Symbol
 | |
|                Server provides you with debugging informaton for the operating
 | |
|                system libraries for debugging Windows applications. For more
 | |
|                information, see \l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \row
 | |
|            \o Debugging tools for Mac OS X
 | |
|            \o The Qt binary distribution contains both debug and release
 | |
|               variants of the libraries. But you have to explicitly tell the
 | |
|               runtime linker that you want to use the debug libraries even if
 | |
|               your application is compiled as debug as release is the default
 | |
|               library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|               If you use a qmake based project in Qt Creator,  you can set a
 | |
|               flag in your run configuration, in \gui Projects mode. In the run
 | |
|               configuration, select \gui{Use debug version of frameworks}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|               For more detailed information about debugging on the Mac, see:
 | |
|               \l http://developer.apple.com/mac/library/technotes/tn2004/tn2124.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note The Mac OS X Snow Leopard (10.6) has a bug, that can be worked
 | |
|               around as described in the link provided below:
 | |
|               \l http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTBUG-4962.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting the Symbol Server in Windows
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To obtain debugging information for the operating system libraries for
 | |
|     debugging Windows applications, add the Symbol Server provided
 | |
|     by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o  Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui Debugger > \gui Cdb.
 | |
|         \o  In the \gui {Symbol paths} field, open the \gui{Insert...} menu
 | |
|             and select \gui{Symbol Server...}.
 | |
|         \o  Select a directory where you want to store the cached information
 | |
|             and click \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             Use a subfolder in a temporary directory, such as
 | |
|             \c {C:\temp\symbolcache}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Populating the cache might take a long time on a slow network
 | |
|     connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The first time you start debugging by using the
 | |
|     Debugging tools for Windows, Qt Creator prompts you to add the Symbol
 | |
|     Server.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging-example.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debug-mode.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugger-engines.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Interacting with the Debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In \gui Debug mode, you can use several views to interact with the
 | |
|     program you are debugging. The availability of views depends on whether
 | |
|     you are debugging C++ or QML. Frequently used views are shown by
 | |
|     default and rarely used ones are hidden. To change the default settings,
 | |
|     select \gui {Window > Views}, and then select views to display or hide.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debugger-views.png "Debug mode views"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, the views are locked into place in the workspace. Select
 | |
|     \gui {Window > Views > Locked} to unlock the views. Drag and drop the
 | |
|     views into new positions on the screen. Drag view borders to resize the
 | |
|     views. The size and position of views are saved for future sessions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting the Debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To start a program under the debugger's control, select \gui{Debug} >
 | |
|     \gui{Start Debugging} > \gui{Start Debugging}, or press \key{F5}.
 | |
|     Qt Creator checks whether the compiled program is up-to-date, rebuilding
 | |
|     it if necessary. The debugger then takes over and starts the program.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Starting a program in the debugger can take a considerable amount of
 | |
|     time, typically in the range of several seconds to minutes if complex
 | |
|     features (like QtWebKit) are used.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugger is launched in the appropriate operating mode (plain, terminal,
 | |
|     or TRK), based on the build and run settings for the active project.
 | |
|     Select \gui Debug menu options to launch the debugger in other modes.
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Debugger Modes of Operation}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Debugging QML and JavaScript is supported only in plain mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Once the program starts running, it behaves and performs as usual.
 | |
|     You can interrupt a running C++ program by selecting \gui{Debug} >
 | |
|     \gui {Interrupt}. The program is automatically interrupted as soon as a
 | |
|     breakpoint is hit.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using the Debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Once the program stops, Qt Creator:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Retrieves data representing the call stack at the program's current
 | |
|            position.
 | |
|         \o Retrieves the contents of local variables.
 | |
|         \o Examines \gui Watchers.
 | |
|         \o Updates the \gui Registers, \gui Modules, and \gui Disassembler
 | |
|            views if you are debugging the C++ language.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \gui Debug mode views to examine the data in more detail.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the following keyboard shortcuts:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o To finish debugging, press \key{Shift+F5}.
 | |
|        \o  To execute a line of code as a whole, press \key{F10}.
 | |
|        \o  To step into a function or a subfunction, press \key{F11}.
 | |
|        \o  To continue running the program, press \key{F5}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     It is also possible to continue executing the program until the current
 | |
|     function completes or jump to an arbitrary position in the current function.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Breakpoints
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A breakpoint represents a position or sets of positions in the code that,
 | |
|     when executed, interrupts the program being debugged and passes the control
 | |
|     to you. You can then examine the state of the interrupted program, or
 | |
|     continue execution either line-by-line or continuously.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator shows breakpoints in the \gui{Breakpoints} view which is enabled
 | |
|     by default. The \gui{Breakpoints} view is also accessible when the debugger
 | |
|     and the program being debugged is not running.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debug-breakpoints.png "Breakpoints view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Typically, breakpoints are associated with a source code file and line, or
 | |
|     the start of a function -- both are allowed in Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The interruption of a program by a breakpoint can be restricted with
 | |
|     certain conditions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To set a breakpoint:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o At a particular line you want the program to stop, click the
 | |
|           left margin or press \key F9 (\key F8 for Mac OS X).
 | |
|        \o At a function that you want the program to interrupt, enter the
 | |
|           function's name in \gui{Set Breakpoint at Function...} located in the
 | |
|           context menu of the \gui{Breakpoints} view.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note You can remove a breakpoint:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o By clicking the breakpoint marker in the text editor.
 | |
|         \o By selecting the breakpoint in the breakpoint view and pressing
 | |
|            \key{Delete}.
 | |
|         \o By selecting \gui{Delete Breakpoint} from the context
 | |
|            menu in the \gui Breakpoints view.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can set and delete breakpoints before the program starts running or
 | |
|     while it is running under the debugger's control. Breakpoints are saved
 | |
|     together with a session.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Call Stack Trace
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the program being debugged is interrupted, Qt Creator displays the
 | |
|     nested function calls leading to the current position as a call stack
 | |
|     trace. This stack trace is built up from call stack frames, each
 | |
|     representing a particular function. For each function, Qt Creator tries
 | |
|     to retrieve the file name and line number of the corresponding source
 | |
|     file. This data is shown in the \gui Stack view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debug-stack.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Since the call stack leading to the current position may originate or go
 | |
|     through code for which no debug information is available, not all stack
 | |
|     frames have corresponding source locations. Stack frames without
 | |
|     corresponding source locations are grayed out in the \gui{Stack} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you click a frame with a known source location, the text editor
 | |
|     jumps to the corresponding location and updates the \gui{Locals and Watchers}
 | |
|     view, making it seem like the program was interrupted before entering the
 | |
|     function.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Locals and Watchers
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Whenever a program stops under the control of the debugger, it retrieves
 | |
|     information about the topmost stack frame and displays it in the
 | |
|     \gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view
 | |
|     typically includes information about parameters of the function in that
 | |
|     frame as well as the local variables.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-watcher.png "Locals and Watchers view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Compound variables of struct or class type are displayed as
 | |
|     expandable in the view. Expand entries to show
 | |
|     all members. Together with the display of value and type, you can
 | |
|     examine and traverse the low-level layout of object data.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Note:}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  Gdb, and therefore Qt Creator's debugger works for optimized
 | |
|                 builds on Linux and Mac OS X. Optimization can lead to
 | |
|                 re-ordering of instructions or removal of some local variables,
 | |
|                 causing the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to show unexpected
 | |
|                 data.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  The debug information provided by gcc does not include enough
 | |
|                 information about the time when a variable is initialized.
 | |
|                 Therefore, Qt Creator can not tell whether the contents of a
 | |
|                 local variable contains "real data", or "initial noise". If a
 | |
|                 QObject appears uninitialized, its value is reported as
 | |
|                 \gui {not in scope}. Not all uninitialized objects, however, can be
 | |
|                 recognized as such.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view also provides access to the most
 | |
|     powerful feature of the debugger: comprehensive display of data belonging
 | |
|     to Qt's basic objects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable Qt's basic objects data display feature:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  Select \gui Tools > \gui {Options...} > \gui Debugger >
 | |
|            \gui{Debugging Helper} and check the \gui{Use Debugging Helper}
 | |
|            checkbox.
 | |
|        \o  The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view is reorganized to provide a
 | |
|            high-level view of the objects.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, in case of QObject, instead of displaying a pointer to some
 | |
|     private data structure, you see a list of children, signals and slots.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Similarly, instead of displaying many pointers and integers, Qt Creator's
 | |
|     debugger displays the contents of a QHash or QMap in an orderly manner.
 | |
|     Also, the debugger displays access data for QFileInfo and provides
 | |
|     access to the "real" contents of QVariant.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to change the contents of
 | |
|     variables of simple data types, for example, \c int or \c float when the
 | |
|     program is interrupted. To do so, click the \gui Value column, modify
 | |
|     the value with the inplace editor, and press \key Enter (or \key Return).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can enable tooltips in the main editor displaying this information.
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Showing Tooltips in Debug Mode}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The set of watched items is saved in your session.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging the C++ Language
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following sections describe additional debugging functions that apply
 | |
|     only to debugging C++.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Starting the Debugger from the Command Line
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Creator debugger interface from the command line. To
 | |
|     attach it to a running process, specify the process ID as a parameter for
 | |
|     the \c {-debug} option. To examine a core file, specify the file name.
 | |
|     Qt Creator executes all the necessary steps, such as searching for
 | |
|     the binary that belongs to a core file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c {C:\qtcreator-2.1\bin>qtcreator -debug 2000}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c {C:\qtcreator-2.1\bin>qtcreator -debug core.2000}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Using Command Line Options}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Stepping into Frameworks in Mac OS
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In Mac OS X, external libraries are usually built into so-called Frameworks,
 | |
|     which may contain both release and debug versions of the library. When you run
 | |
|     applications on the Mac OS desktop, the release version of Frameworks is used
 | |
|     by default. To step into Frameworks, select the \gui {Use debug versions of
 | |
|     Frameworks} option in the project run settings for \gui Desktop and
 | |
|     \gui {Qt Simulator} targets.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Threads
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If a multi-threaded program is interrupted, the \gui Thread view or the
 | |
|     combobox named \gui Thread in the debugger's status bar can be used to
 | |
|     switch from one thread to another. The \gui Stack view adjusts itself
 | |
|     accordingly.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Modules
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Modules} view displays information that the debugger plugin has
 | |
|     about modules included in the application that is being debugged. A module
 | |
|     is a dynamic link library (.dll) in Windows, a shared object (.so) in
 | |
|     Linux, and a dynamic shared library (.dylib) in Mac OS.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition, the view displays symbols within the modules and indicates
 | |
|     where each module was loaded.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Right-click the view to open a context menu that contains menu items for:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Updating the module list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Loading symbols for modules
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Examining modules
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Editing module files
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Showing symbols in modules
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Showing dependencies between modules (Windows only)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, the \gui{Modules} view is hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Source Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Source Files} view lists all the source files included in the project.
 | |
|     If you cannot step into an instruction, you can check whether the source file is
 | |
|     actually part of the project, or whether it was compiled
 | |
|     elsewhere. The view shows the path to each file in the file system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Right-click the view to open a context menu that contains menu items for
 | |
|     reloading data and opening files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, the \gui{Source Files} view is hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Disassembled Code and Register State
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Disassembler} view displays disassembled code for the current
 | |
|     function. The \gui{Registers} view displays the current state of the CPU's
 | |
|     registers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Disassembler} view and the \gui{Registers} view are both useful
 | |
|     for low-level commands for checking single instructions, such as \gui{Step Into}
 | |
|     and \gui{Step Over}. By default, both \gui{Disassembler} and
 | |
|     \gui{Registers} view are hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging-example.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debug-mode.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugging the Example Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section uses the \l{Creating a Qt Widget Based Application}{TextFinder} example to
 | |
|     illustrate how to debug Qt C++ applications in the \gui Debug mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     TextFinder
 | |
|     reads a text file into
 | |
|     QString and then displays it with QTextEdit.
 | |
|     To look at the example QString, \c{line}, and see the
 | |
|     stored data, place a breakpoint and view the QString object
 | |
|     data, as follows:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Click in between the line number and the window border on the line
 | |
|         where we invoke \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}
 | |
|         to set a breakpoint.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint1.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging} or press \key{F5}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To view the breakpoint, click the \gui{Breakpoints} tab.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint2.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To remove a breakpoint, right-click it and select \gui{Delete Breakpoint}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To view the contents of \c{line}, go to the \gui{Locals and
 | |
|     Watchers} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-watcher.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Modify the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} function to move back to
 | |
|     the start of the document and continue searching once the cursor hits the
 | |
|     end of the document. Add the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     void TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()
 | |
|     {
 | |
|         QString searchString = ui->lineEdit->text();
 | |
| 
 | |
|         QTextDocument *document = ui->textEdit->document();
 | |
|         QTextCursor cursor = ui->textEdit->textCursor();
 | |
|         cursor = document->find(searchString, cursor,
 | |
|             QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
 | |
|         ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
 | |
| 
 | |
|         bool found = cursor.isNull();
 | |
| 
 | |
|         if (!found && previouslyFound) {
 | |
|             int ret = QMessageBox::question(this, tr("End of Document"),
 | |
|             tr("I have reached the end of the document. Would you like "
 | |
|             "me to start searching from the beginning of the document?"),
 | |
|             QMessageBox::Yes | QMessageBox::No, QMessageBox::Yes);
 | |
| 
 | |
|             if (ret == QMessageBox::Yes) {
 | |
|                 cursor = document->find(searchString,
 | |
|                     QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
 | |
|                 ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
 | |
|             } else
 | |
|                 return;
 | |
|         }
 | |
|         previouslyFound = found;
 | |
|     }
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you compile and run the above code, however, the application does not
 | |
|     work correctly due to a logic error. To locate this logic error, step
 | |
|     through the code using the following buttons:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debugging-buttons.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|  */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugger-operating-modes.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging-helpers.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging-qml.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using Debugging Helpers
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator is able to show complex data types in a customized,
 | |
|     user-extensible manner. For this purpose, it takes advantage of
 | |
|     two technologies, collectively referred to as \e{Debugging Helpers}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Using the debugging helpers is not \e essential for debugging
 | |
|     with Qt Creator, but they enhance the user's ability to quickly
 | |
|     examine complex data significantly.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging Helpers Based on C++
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This is the first and original approach to display complex data
 | |
|     types. While it has been superseded on most platforms by the more
 | |
|     robust and more flexible second approch using Python scripting,
 | |
|     it is the only feasible one on Windows/MSVC, Mac OS, and
 | |
|     old Linux distributions. Moreover, this approach will automatically
 | |
|     be chosen as fallback in case the Python based approach fails.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     During debugging with the C++ based debugging helpers,
 | |
|     Qt Creator dynamically loads a helper library in form of a DLL or a
 | |
|     shared object into the debugged process.
 | |
|     The \QSDK package already contains a prebuilt debugging helper
 | |
|     library. To create your own debugging helper library, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{Qt Versions}. As the internal data
 | |
|     structures of Qt can change between versions, the debugging helper
 | |
|     library is built for each Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging Helpers Based on Python
 | |
| 
 | |
|     On platforms featuring a Python-enabled version of the gdb debugger,
 | |
|     the data extraction is done by a Python script. This is more robust
 | |
|     as the script execution is separated from the debugged process. It
 | |
|     is also easier to extend as the script is less dependent on the
 | |
|     actual Qt version and does not need compilation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To extend the shipped Python based debugging helpers for custom types,
 | |
|     define one Python function per user defined type in the
 | |
|     gdb startup file. By default, the following startup file is used:
 | |
|     \c{~/.gdbinit}. To use another file, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Gdb}
 | |
|     and specify a filename in the \gui {Gdb startup script} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The function name has to be qdump__NS__Foo, where NS::Foo is the class
 | |
|     or class template to be examined. Nested namespaces are possible.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugger plugin calls this function whenever you want to
 | |
|     display an object of this type. The function is passed the following
 | |
|     parameters:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  \c d of type \c Dumper
 | |
|        \o  \c item of type \c Item
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The function has to feed the Dumper object with certain information
 | |
|     which is used to build up the object and its children's display in the
 | |
|     \gui{Locals and Watchers} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     def qdump__QVector(d, item):
 | |
|         d_ptr = item.value["d"]
 | |
|         p_ptr = item.value["p"]
 | |
|         alloc = d_ptr["alloc"]
 | |
|         size = d_ptr["size"]
 | |
| 
 | |
|         check(0 <= size and size <= alloc and alloc <= 1000 * 1000 * 1000)
 | |
|         check(d_ptr["ref"]["_q_value"] > 0)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         innerType = item.value.type.template_argument(0)
 | |
|         d.putItemCount(size)
 | |
|         d.putNumChild(size)
 | |
|         if d.isExpanded(item):
 | |
|             p = gdb.Value(p_ptr["array"]).cast(innerType.pointer())
 | |
|             with Children(d, [size, 2000], innerType)
 | |
|                 for i in d.childRange():
 | |
|                     d.putSubItem(Item(p.dereference(), item.iname, i))
 | |
|                     p += 1
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Item Class
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Item Python class is a thin wrapper around values corresponding to one
 | |
|     line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The Item members are as follows :
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{__init__(self, value, parentiname, iname, name = None)} - A
 | |
|        constructor. The object's internal name is created by concatenating
 | |
|        \c parentiname and \c iname. If \c None is passed as \c name, a
 | |
|        serial number is used.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{value} - An object of type gdb.Value representing the value to
 | |
|         be displayed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{iname} - The internal name of the object, constituting a dot-separated
 | |
|     list of identifiers, corresponding to the position of the object's
 | |
|     representation in the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{name} - An optional name. If given, is used in the
 | |
|     \gui{name} column of the view. If not, a simple number in brackets
 | |
|     is used instead.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Dumper Class
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For each line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, a string like the
 | |
|     following needs to be created and channeled to the debugger plugin.
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     "{iname='some internal name',
 | |
|       addr='object address in memory',
 | |
|       name='contents of the name column',
 | |
|       value='contents of the value column',
 | |
|       type='contents of the type column',
 | |
|       numchild='number of children',        // zero/nonzero is sufficient
 | |
|       childtype='default type of children', // optional
 | |
|       childnumchild='default number of grandchildren', // optional
 | |
|       children=[              // only needed if item is expanded in view
 | |
|          {iname='internal name of first child',
 | |
|           ... },
 | |
|          {iname='internal name of second child',
 | |
|           ... },
 | |
|          ...
 | |
|       ]}"
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     While in theory, you can build up the entire string above manually, it is
 | |
|     easier to employ the Dumper Python class for that purpose. The Dumper
 | |
|     Python class contains a complete framework to take care of the \c iname and
 | |
|     \c addr fields, to handle children of simple types, references, pointers,
 | |
|     enums, known and unknown structs as well as some convenience methods to
 | |
|     handle common situations.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Dumper members are the following:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{__init__(self)} - Initializes the output to an empty string and
 | |
|         empties the child stack.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{put(self, value)} - Low level method to directly append to the
 | |
|         output string.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putCommaIfNeeded(self)} - Appends a comma if the current output
 | |
|         ends in '}', '"' or ']' .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putField(self, name, value)} - Appends a comma if needed, and a
 | |
|          name='value' field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{beginItem(self, name)} - Starts writing a field by writing \c {name='}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{endItem(self)} - Ends writing a field by writing \c {'}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{endChildren(self)} - Ends writing a list of children.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{childRange(self)} - Returns the range of children specified in
 | |
|         the current \c Children scope.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putItemCount(self, count)} - Appends a field  \c {value='<%d items'}
 | |
|         to the output.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putEllipsis(self)} - Appends fields
 | |
|         \c {'{name="<incomplete>",value="",type="",numchild="0"}'}. This is
 | |
|         automatically done by \c endChildren if the number of children to
 | |
|         print is smaller than the number of actual children.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putName(self, name)} - Appends a \c {name='...'} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putType(self, type)} - Appends a field \c {type='...'} unless the
 | |
|         \a type coincides with the parent's default child type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putNumChild(self, numchild)} - Appends a field \c {numchild='...'}
 | |
|         unless the \c numchild coincides with the parent's default child numchild
 | |
|         value.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putValue(self, value, encoding = None)} - Append a file \c {value='...'},
 | |
|         optionally followed by a field \c {valueencoding='...'}. The \c value
 | |
|         needs to be convertible to a string entirely consisting of
 | |
|         alphanumerical values. The \c encoding parameter can be used to
 | |
|         specify the encoding in case the real value had to be encoded in some
 | |
|         way to meet the alphanumerical-only requirement.
 | |
|         Currently the following encodings are supported:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o 0: unencoded 8 bit data, interpreted as Latin1.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 1: base64 encoded 8 bit data, used for QByteArray,
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 2: base64 encoded 16 bit data, used for QString,
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 3: base64 encoded 32 bit data,
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 4: base64 encoded 16 bit data, without quotes (see 2)
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 5: base64 encoded 8 bit data, without quotes (see 1)
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 6: %02x encoded 8 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 7: %04x encoded 16 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putStringValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QString and calls
 | |
|         \c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putByteArrayValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QByteArray and calls
 | |
|         \c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{isExpanded(self, item)} - Checks whether the item with the
 | |
|         internal name \c item.iname is expanded in the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{isExpandedIName(self, iname)} - Checks whether the item with the
 | |
|         internal name \c iname is expanded in the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{putIntItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         self.beginHash()
 | |
|         self.putName(name)
 | |
|         self.putValue(value)
 | |
|         self.putType("int")
 | |
|         self.putNumChild(0)
 | |
|         self.endHash()
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{putBoolItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         self.beginHash()
 | |
|         self.putName(name)
 | |
|         self.putValue(value)
 | |
|         self.putType("bool")
 | |
|         self.putNumChild(0)
 | |
|         self.endHash()
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{pushOutput(self)} - Moves the output string to a safe location
 | |
|         from with it is sent to the debugger plugin even if further operations
 | |
|         raise an exception.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putCallItem(self, name, item, func)} -
 | |
|         Uses gdb to call the function \c func on the value specified by
 | |
|         \a {item.value} and output the resulting item. This function is
 | |
|         not available when debugging core dumps and it is not available
 | |
|         on the Symbian platform due to restrictions imposed by AppTRK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putItem(self, item)} - The "master function", handling
 | |
|         basic types, references, pointers and enums directly, iterates
 | |
|         over base classes and class members of compound types and calls
 | |
|         \c qdump__* functions whenever appropriate.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putSubItem(self, item)} - Equivalent to:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         with SubItem(self):
 | |
|             self.putItem(item)
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
|         Exceptions raised by nested function calls are caught and all
 | |
|         output produced by \c putItem is replaced by the output of:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|             ...
 | |
|         except RuntimeError:
 | |
|             d.put('value="<invalid>",type="<unknown>",numchild="0",')
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Children and SubItem Class
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The attempt to create child items might lead to errors if data is
 | |
|     uninitialized or corrupted. To gracefully recover in such situations,
 | |
|     use \c Children and \c SubItem \e{Context Managers} to create the nested items.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \c Children constructor \gui{__init__(self, dumper, numChild = 1,
 | |
|     childType = None, childNumChild = None)} uses one mandatory argument and three
 | |
|     optional arguments.  The mandatory argument refers to the current \c Dumper
 | |
|     object.  The optional arguments can be used to specify the number \c numChild
 | |
|     of children, with type \c childType_ and \c childNumChild_ grandchildren each.
 | |
|     If \c numChild_ is a list of two integers, the first one specifies the actual
 | |
|     number of children and the second the maximum number of children to print.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Similarly, using the \c SubItem class helps to protect individual items.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Example:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     d.putNumChild(2)
 | |
|     if d.isExpanded(item):
 | |
|         with Children(d):
 | |
|             with SubItem(d):
 | |
|                 d.putName("key")
 | |
|                 d.putItem(Item(key, item.iname, "key"))
 | |
|             with SubItem(d):
 | |
|                 d.putName("value")
 | |
|                 d.putItem(Item(value, item.iname, "value"))
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging Helpers for QML
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugging helpers for QML provide you with code completion for custom modules
 | |
|     (\c qmldump) and debugging Qt Quick UI projects (\c qmlobserver).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You have to build the QML Observer once for each Qt version that you want to debug
 | |
|     with. Select \gui{Tools > Options... > Qt4 > Qt Versions}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note QML Observer requires Qt 4.7.1 or later.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-qmake-libraries.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-cmake.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-generic.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up a CMake Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     CMake is an alternative to qmake for automating the generation of makefiles.
 | |
|     It controls the software compilation process by using simple configuration
 | |
|     files, called CMakeLists.txt files. CMake generates native makefiles and
 | |
|     workspaces that you can use in the compiler environment of your choice.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Since Qt Creator 1.1, CMake configuration files are supported.
 | |
|     Qt Creator 1.3 supports the Microsoft Toolchain if the CMake version
 | |
|     is at least 2.8.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting the Path for CMake
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can set the path for the \c CMake executable in \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Options... > Projects > CMake}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmakeexecutable.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Before you open a \c CMake project it is necessary to modify the
 | |
|     \c{PATH} environment variable to include the bin folders of \c mingw and
 | |
|     Qt Creator in the SDK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For instance, if you have the Qt SDK installed in your C drive,
 | |
|     use the following command to set the environment variables in
 | |
|     the command line prompt:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     set PATH=C:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;C:\qtsdk\qt\bin;
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|     Then start Qt Creator by typing:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     C:\qtsdk\bin\qtcreator.exe
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Opening CMake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open a \c CMake project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o  Select \gui{File} > \gui{Open File or Project...}.
 | |
|         \o  Select the \c{CMakeLists.txt} file from your \c CMake project.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A wizard guides you through the rest of the process.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If the \c CMake project does not have an in-place build, Qt Creator
 | |
|     lets you specify the directory in which the project is built
 | |
|    (\l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow build}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard1.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The screenshot below shows how you can specify command line arguments to
 | |
|     \c CMake for your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard2.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Normally, there is no need to pass any command line arguments for projects
 | |
|     that are already built, as \c CMake caches that information.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building CMake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator builds \c CMake projects by running \c make, \c mingw32-make, or
 | |
|     \c nmake depending on your platform. The build errors and warnings are
 | |
|     parsed and displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} output pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, Qt Creator builds the \bold{all} target. You can specify which
 | |
|     targets to build in \gui{Project} mode, under \gui{Build Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmake-build-settings.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator supports multiple build configurations. The build
 | |
|     directory can also be modified after the initial import.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running CMake Projects
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically adds \gui{Run Configurations} for all targets
 | |
|     specified in the \c CMake project file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Known issues for the current version can be found
 | |
|     \l{Known Issues}{here}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding External Libraries to CMake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
 | |
|     syntax highlighting as if they were part of the current project or the Qt
 | |
|     library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator detects the external libraries using the \c FIND_PACKAGE()
 | |
|     macro. Some libraries come with the CMake installation. You can find those
 | |
|     in the \bold{Modules} directory of your CMake installation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you provide your own libraries, you also need to provide your own
 | |
|     \c FindFoo.cmake file. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://vtk.org/Wiki/CMake_FAQ#Writing_FindXXX.cmake_files}{CMake FAQ}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Syntax completion and highlighting work once your project successfully
 | |
|     builds and links against the external library.
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging-helpers.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging-qml.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-maemo-emulator.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugging Qt Quick Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note You need Qt 4.7.1 or later to debug Qt Quick projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up QML Debugging
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The process of setting up debugging for Qt Quick projects depends on the type of
 | |
|     the project: Qt Quick UI or Qt Quick Application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To debug Qt Quick UI projects:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Projects, and then select the \gui QML check box in the
 | |
|         \gui {Run Settings}, to enable QML debugging.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Compile the debugging helpers. For more information, see
 | |
|         \l{Debugging Helpers for QML}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To debug Qt Quick Applications:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Modify the project file to comment in the following line:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \c {DEFINES += QMLJSDEBUGGER}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Projects, and then select the \gui QML check box in the
 | |
|         \gui {Run Settings}, to enable QML debugging.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Target selector}, select a debug configuration for
 | |
|         the target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-target-selector-debug.png "Target selector"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Build > Rebuild Project} to clean and rebuild the project
 | |
|         in debug mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can create debug configurations for project targets in the \gui Projects mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting QML Debugging
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To start the application, choose \gui {Debug > Start Debugging
 | |
|     > Start Debugging} or press \key F5. Once the application starts running, it behaves
 | |
|     and performs as usual. You can then perform the following tasks:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Debug JavaScript functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Preview QML changes at runtime
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Inspect QML at runtime
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging JavaScript Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of your
 | |
|     application while debugging. You can interact with the debugger in several
 | |
|     ways, as described in the following sections:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Setting Breakpoints}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Viewing Call Stack Trace}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Locals and Watchers}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Executing JavaScript Expressions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the application is interrupted by a breakpoint, you can use the \gui {QML
 | |
|     Script Console} to execute JavaScript expressions in the current context. To
 | |
|     open it, choose \gui {Window > View > QML Script Console}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-script-console.png "QML Script Console view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can type JavaScript expressions and use them to get information about the
 | |
|     state or your application. For example, property values.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can see the current value of a property by hovering over it in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Previewing QML Changes at Runtime
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you change property values or add properties in the code editor, the changes
 | |
|     are updated in the running application when you save them. If live preview is not supported
 | |
|     for an element, a message appears. Click \gui Reload to preview the changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Reloading is enabled by default. To disable it, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qml-observer-bar-reload.png "Apply Changes on Save button"
 | |
|     in the \gui {QML Observer} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Inspecting QML at Runtime
 | |
| 
 | |
|     While the application is running, you can use the \gui {QML Observer} view to
 | |
|     explore the object structure, debug animations, and inspect colors.
 | |
|     To open the \gui {QML Observer} view, choose \gui {Window > View > QML Observer}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-observer-view.png "QML Observer view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you debug complex applications, you can use the observe
 | |
|     mode to jump to the position in code where an element is defined. To switch to
 | |
|     the observe mode, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qml-observer-bar-observe.png
 | |
|     in the \gui {QML Observer} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Click elements in the running application to jump to their definitions in the code.
 | |
|     Double-click elements to browse the element hierarchy. The hierarchy is displayed
 | |
|     as bread crumbs in the \gui {QML Observer} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also right-click an element in the running application to view the element
 | |
|     hierarchy as a context menu. Select an element to jump to its definition in code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-observer-context-menu.png "QML Observer"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To zoom in and out of the application, click the \gui Zoom button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To inspect colors, click the \gui {Color Picker} button. You can also click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qml-observer-bar-copy-color.png "Copy Color button"
 | |
|     to copy the color definition to the clipboard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging Animations
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-observer.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To play and pause animations in the running application, click the \gui {Play/Pause Animations}
 | |
|     button in the \gui {QML Observer} view or \gui {Debugging > Animations > Pause} or press
 | |
|     \key {Ctrl+.}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To step through an animation, select \gui {Debugging > Animations > Pause & Step}
 | |
|     or press \key {Ctrl+,}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To set step duration in milliseconds, select \gui {Debugging > Animations > Set Step}.
 | |
|     To change the speed at which animations are played, select a value in \gui {Debugging
 | |
|     > Animations}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-cmake.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-generic.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up a Generic Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator supports generic projects, so you can import existing projects
 | |
|     that do not use qmake or CMake and Qt Creator ignores your build system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Generic project support allows you to use Qt Creator as a code editor. You
 | |
|     can change the way your project is built by modifying the \c make command
 | |
|     in the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Build Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you import a project, Qt Creator creates the following files that
 | |
|     allow you to specify which files belong to your project and which include
 | |
|     directories or defines you want to pass to your compile:
 | |
|     \tt{.files}, \tt{.includes}, and \tt{.config}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Importing a Generic Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To import an existing generic project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project...} >
 | |
|            \gui{Other Project} > \gui{Import Existing Project}.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{Import Existing Project}, enter the project name
 | |
|            and select the location of the project file you want to import.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Qt Creator automatically generates the following files in the
 | |
|            project directory:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o \l{Specifying Files}{.files}
 | |
|                \o \l{Specifying Include Paths}{.includes}
 | |
|                \o \l{Specifying Defines}{.config}
 | |
|                \o .creator
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the project is successfully imported, Qt Creator creates the project
 | |
|     tree in the sidebar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     After importing a generic project into Qt Creator, open it by selecting the
 | |
|     \tt{.creator} file.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Working with Generic Project Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For a generic project, you have to manually specify which files belong to
 | |
|     your project and which include directories or defines you want to pass to
 | |
|     your compiler.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The list of files for a generic project is specified in the \tt{.files}
 | |
|     file. When you first create a generic project, Qt Creator adds any
 | |
|     files it recognizes to your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add or remove files, edit the \tt{.files} file in Qt Creator.
 | |
|     Qt Creator recreates your project tree when you save the \tt{.files} file.
 | |
|     Alternatively, you can add and remove files using the context menu in the
 | |
|     project tree.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you frequently need to update the \tt{.files} file, you can do so
 | |
|     efficiently by using a script that updates the file for you. If the file
 | |
|     is modified externally, you have to restart Qt Creator for the changes to
 | |
|     take effect.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To update the \tt{.files} on the \gui Git repository use the following
 | |
|     script:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     git ls-files "*.cpp" "*.h" > MyProject.files
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Include Paths
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The include paths are specified in the \tt{.includes} file, one include
 | |
|     path per line. The paths can be either absolute or relative to the
 | |
|     \tt{.includes} file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Defines
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The defines are specified in the \tt{.config} file. The \tt{.config} file is
 | |
|     a regular C++ file, prepended to all your source files when they are parsed.
 | |
|     Only use the \tt{.config} file to add lines as in the example below:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     #define NAME value
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating a Run Configuration
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator cannot automatically determine which executable to run.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Run Settings}, define the executable
 | |
|     file to run:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Add and select \gui{Custom Executable}.
 | |
|         \o Define the configuration name, the location of the executable, any
 | |
|            additional arguments and the working directory.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-design-mode.html
 | |
|     \page creator-visual-editor.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-projects.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Developing Qt Quick Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can either create Qt Quick projects from scratch or import existing projects to
 | |
|     Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the code editor (\l{Using the Editor}{Edit mode}) or the visual editor
 | |
|     (\l{Using Qt Quick Designer}{Design mode}) to develop Qt Quick applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-qt-quick-editors.png "Edit mode and Design mode"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following sections describe typical tasks you can do with Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l {Creating Qt Quick Projects}
 | |
|         \o \l {Using Qt Quick Designer}
 | |
|         \o \l {Creating Components}
 | |
|         \o \l {Creating Buttons}
 | |
|         \o \l {Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}
 | |
|         \o \l {Creating Screens}
 | |
|         \o \l {Animating Screens}
 | |
|         \o \l {Adding User Interaction Methods}
 | |
|         \o \l {Exporting Designs from Graphics Software}
 | |
|         \o \l {Implementing Application Logic}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-visual-editor.html
 | |
|     \page quick-projects.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-using-qt-quick-designer.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating Qt Quick Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you create a new Qt Quick project from scratch, you have the following options:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Qt Quick Application} creates a Qt Quick application project that can
 | |
|         contain both QML and C++ code. The project includes a QDeclarativeView. You can build
 | |
|         the application and deploy it on desktop and mobile target platforms. For example, you
 | |
|         can create signed Symbian Installation System (SIS) packages for this type of projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Qt Quick UI} creates a Qt Quick UI project with a single QML file that
 | |
|         contains the main view. You can review Qt Quick UI projects in the QML Viewer and you
 | |
|         need not build them. You do not need to have the development environment installed on your
 | |
|         computer to create and run this type of projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Custom QML Extension Plugin} creates a C++ plugin that makes it possible
 | |
|         to offer extensions that can be loaded dynamically into applications by using the
 | |
|         QDeclarativeEngine class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have existing QML applications that you want to run in Qt Creator or deploy
 | |
|     to mobile devices, use the \gui {Qt Quick Application} wizard to convert them
 | |
|     to Qt Quick applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Qt Quick UI Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick UI
 | |
|         > Choose...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-ui-project-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Name field, give a name to the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Do not use spaces and special characters in the project name and path.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
 | |
|         \c {C:\Qt\examples}. To select the path from a directory tree, click \gui Browse.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-ui-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator creates the following files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o .qmlproject project file defines that all QML, JavaScript, and image
 | |
|     files in the project folder belong to the project. Therefore, you do not
 | |
|     need to individually list all the files in the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o .qml file defines an element, such as a component, screen, or the whole
 | |
|     application UI.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \c import statement in the beginning of the .qml file specifies the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativemodules.html} {Qt modules}
 | |
|     to import. Each Qt module contains a set of default elements.
 | |
|     Specify a version to get the features you want.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use JavaScript and image files in the application, copy them to the
 | |
|     project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Qt Quick Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick Application
 | |
|         > Choose...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Name field, give a name to the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Do not use spaces and special characters in the project name and path.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
 | |
|         \c {C:\Qt\examples}. To select the path from a directory tree, click \gui Browse.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Qt Versions} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-qt-versions.png "Qt Versions dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the Qt versions to use as build targets for your project,
 | |
|         and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Qt Quick is supported since Qt 4.7, and therefore, only Qt 4.7 and later
 | |
|         versions are displayed. Further, if you have only one supported Qt version installed,
 | |
|         this dialog is skipped.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Mobile Options} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-app-project-mobile-options.png "Mobile Options dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Orientation behavior} field, determine how the application
 | |
|         behaves when the orientation of the device display rotates between portrait
 | |
|         and landscape, and then click \gui Next.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note This dialog opens only if you select \gui Maemo5 or
 | |
|         \gui {Symbian Device} target in the \gui {Qt Versions} dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Symbian Specific} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-symbian-options.png "Symbian Specific dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Application icon (.svg)} field, select an application
 | |
|         icon for the \gui {Symbian Device} target, or use the default icon.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Target UID3} field, specify the \l{Application UID}, or
 | |
|         use the default UID.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Qt Creator generates a UID for testing the application on a device.
 | |
|         You need to change the UID when you deliver the application for public
 | |
|         use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Next.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Maemo Specific} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-maemo-options.png "Maemo Specific dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Application icon (64x64)} field, select the application
 | |
|          icon to use on Maemo targets, or use the default icon.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {QML Sources} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-qml-sources.png "QML Sources" dialog
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {QML Main File} group, select \gui {Generate a .qml file},
 | |
|         and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui {Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-summary.png "Project Management" dialog
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Add to project} field, you can add this project to another
 | |
|         project as a subproject.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Add to version control} field, you can add the project to
 | |
|         a version control system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Finish to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator creates the necessary boilerplate files. Some of the files are
 | |
|     specific to the Symbian or Maemo platform.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Importing QML Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have existing QML applications that you want to run in Qt Creator or deploy
 | |
|     to mobile devices, use the \gui {Qt Quick Application} wizard and select the main
 | |
|     .qml file in your project. All the other files in the project are automatically added
 | |
|     to the application project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, you can open and run the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativeexamples.html} {QML examples and demos}
 | |
|     to learn how to use various aspects of QML. To run the examples in the QML Viewer
 | |
|     on the desktop, open them in the \gui Welcome mode. To view the examples on
 | |
|     mobile devices, use the \gui {Qt Quick Application} wizard to convert them into
 | |
|     Qt Quick Applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To import QML applications:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick Application
 | |
|         > Choose...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Name the project and set its path, and then click \gui Next.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the Qt versions to use as build targets for your project, and click
 | |
|         \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Specify options for deploying the application to mobile device targets, and
 | |
|         click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {QML Sources} dialog, select the \gui {Import an existing .qml file}
 | |
|         option and specify the main .qml file of the project you want to import.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-import-project.png "QML Sources" dialog
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Next.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator adds references to the QML files to a project and creates the additional files
 | |
|     necessary for deploying applications to mobile devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-using-qt-quick-designer.html
 | |
|     \page quick-components.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-buttons.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating Components
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A QML component provides a way of defining a new type that you can re-use in other QML
 | |
|     files. A component is like a black box; it interacts with the outside world
 | |
|     through properties, signals, and slots, and is generally defined in its own QML file.
 | |
|     You can import components to screens and applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the following QML elements to create components:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
 | |
|         uses an image as a border or background.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-image.html}{Image}
 | |
|         adds a bitmap to the scene. You can stretch and tile images.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-item.html}{Item}
 | |
|         is the most basic of all visual items in QML. Even though it has no visual appearance,
 | |
|         it defines all the properties that are common across visual items, such as the x and
 | |
|         y position, width and height, anchoring, and key handling.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-rectangle.html}{Rectangle}
 | |
|         adds a rectangle that is painted with a solid fill color and an optional border.
 | |
|         You can also use the radius property to create rounded rectangles.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-text.html}{Text}
 | |
|         adds formatted read-only text.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-textedit.html}{Text Edit}
 | |
|         adds a single line of editable formatted text that can be validated.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-textinput.html}{Text Input}
 | |
|         adds a single line of editable plain text that can be validated.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Components in Qt Quick Designer
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Files and Classes > QML
 | |
|         > Choose...} to create a new .qml file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Components are listed in the \gui {QML Components} section of the
 | |
|         \gui Library pane only if the filename begins with a capital letter.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Design to open the .qml file in \QMLD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop an item from the \gui Library pane to the editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Edit item properties in the \gui Properties pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The available properties depend on the item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following sections contain examples of how to create some common components:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating Buttons}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-components.html
 | |
|     \page quick-buttons.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-scalable-image.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating Buttons
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a button component:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > QML > QML File > Choose...} to
 | |
|          create a QML file called Button.qml (for example).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Components are listed in the \gui Library pane only if the filename
 | |
|         begins with a capital letter.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Navigator pane, click \gui Rectangle to set properties
 | |
|         for it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Properties pane, modify the appearance of the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Size field, set the width (\gui W) and height (\gui H)
 | |
|             of the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Color field, select the button color.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Radius field, use the slider to set the radius of the
 | |
|             rectangle and produce rounded corners for the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui {Text} item on top of the \gui Rectangle. This
 | |
|         creates a nested element where \gui Rectangle is the parent element of
 | |
|         \gui Text. Elements are positioned relative to their parents.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Properties pane, edit the properties of the \gui Text item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Text field, type \bold Button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             You can select the text color, font, size, and style in the \gui Font
 | |
|             section.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Alignment field, select the center buttons to align
 | |
|             the text to the center of the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|             button to anchor the text to the whole button area.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Press \key {Ctrl+S} to save the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-button.png "Button component"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To view the button, you must add it to a Qt Quick Application or Qt Quick UI
 | |
|     project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a graphical button that scales beautifully without using vector graphics,
 | |
|     use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
 | |
|     element. For more information, see \l{Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-buttons.html
 | |
|     \page quick-scalable-image.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-screens.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
 | |
|     element to display an image, such as a PNG file, as a border and a background.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use two Border Image elements and suitable graphics to make it look like the button
 | |
|     is pushed down when it is clicked. One of the Border Image elements is visible by default.
 | |
|     You can specify that it is hidden and the other one becomes visible when the mouse
 | |
|     is clicked.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Add a MouseArea that covers the whole area and emits the clicked signal (\c {parent.clicked()})
 | |
|     when it detects a mouse click.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add text to the button and set it up as a property. The text can then be initialized
 | |
|     from the outside, making the button a reusable UI component. The font size is also available
 | |
|     in case the default size is too big. You can scale down the button text and use smooth text
 | |
|     rendering for some extra quality.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-borderimage.png "Graphical button"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a graphical button:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > QML > QML File > Choose...} to create
 | |
|         a QML file called Button.qml (for example).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Replace the \gui Rectangle with an \gui Item, as illustrated by the
 | |
|         following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \qml
 | |
|         Item {
 | |
| 
 | |
|         }
 | |
|         \endqml
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Specify properties and set expressions for the \gui Item, as
 | |
|         illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet snippets/qml/quick-scalable-image.qml properties and signal definitions
 | |
| 
 | |
|         You will point to the properties and expression later.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop two \gui BorderImage items from the \gui Library pane to
 | |
|         the scene.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui Text item to the scene.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui MouseArea to the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Navigator pane, select \gui border_image1 to specify
 | |
|         settings for it in the \gui Properties pane:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Select \gui {Set Expression} in the menu next to the \gui Visibility
 | |
|             check box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Enter the following expression to specify that the image is visible
 | |
|             when the mouse is not pressed down: \c {!mouse_area1.pressed}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
 | |
|             button, for example button_up.png.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|             button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui border_image2 to specify similar settings for it:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Set the following epression for \gui Visibility, to specify that
 | |
|             the image is visible when the mouse is pressed down:
 | |
|             \c {mouse_area1.pressed}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
 | |
|             button when it is clicked, for example button_down.png.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|             button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui text1 to specify font size and color, and text
 | |
|         scaling and rendering:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Color field, use the color picker to select
 | |
|             the font color, or enter a value in the field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Text field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
 | |
|             enter a pointer to the \c {text} property that you specified
 | |
|             earlier: \c {parent.txt}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Select the \gui Aliasing check box to enable smooth text
 | |
|             rendering.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Pixels} to specify
 | |
|             the font size in pixels. By default, the size is specified in
 | |
|             points.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
 | |
|             enter a pointer to the \c {fontSize} property that you specified
 | |
|             earlier.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-center-in.png "Anchor buttons"
 | |
|             buttons to inherit the vertical and horizontal centering from
 | |
|             the parent.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui Advanced to specify scaling for the text in the
 | |
|             \gui Scale field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Select \gui {Set Expression} and enter the following expression:
 | |
|             \c {if (!mousearea1.pressed) { 1 } else { 0.95 }}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \note You can enter long and complicated expressions also in the
 | |
|             code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the code editor, add to the \c MouseArea item
 | |
|         a pointer to the \c clicked expression that you added earlier:
 | |
|         \c {onClicked: parent.clicked()}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To view the button, you must add it to a Qt Quick Application or Qt
 | |
|     Quick UI project.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-scalable-image.html
 | |
|     \page quick-screens.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-animations.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating Screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use predefined QML elements and your own components to create screens.
 | |
|     Typically, the main qml file in a Qt Quick project specifies the main window of an
 | |
|     application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The QML files in the project folder are displayed in \gui {QML Components} in the
 | |
|     \gui Library pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding Components to Screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop components from the \gui Library pane to the editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select components in the \gui Navigator pane to edit their properties
 | |
|         in the \gui Properties pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         For example, you can anchor components to a position on the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Organizing Items on Screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can create the following types of views to organize items provided by
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativemodels.html}{data models}:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-gridview.html}{Grid View}
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-listview.html}{List View}
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-pathview.html}{Path View}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the code editor, write the code to use the data models.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using States
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use states and transitions
 | |
|     to navigate between screens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     QML states typically describe user interface configurations, such as the UI elements,
 | |
|     their properties and behavior and the available actions. For example, you can use
 | |
|     states to create two screens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add states, click the empty slot in the \gui States pane. Then modify the new state
 | |
|     in the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-states.png "States pane"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The properties that you change in a state are highlighted with blue color.
 | |
|     In the code editor, you can see the changes recorded as changes to the base state.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To keep the QML code clean, you should create a base state that contains all the
 | |
|     elements you will need in the application. You can then create states, in
 | |
|     which you hide and show a set of items and modify their properties.
 | |
|     This allows you to:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Align items on different screens with each other.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Avoid excessive property changes. If an item is invisible in the base
 | |
|         state, you must define all changes to its child elements as property changes,
 | |
|         which leads to complicated QML code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Minimize the differences between the base state and the other states
 | |
|         to keep the QML code short and readable and to improve performance.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Avoid problems when using transitions and animation when changing
 | |
|         states.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create screens for an application by using states:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the base state, add all elements you will need in the application.
 | |
|         While you work on one screen, you can click the
 | |
|         \inlineimage qmldesigner-show-hide-icon.png
 | |
|         icon to hide elements on the canvas that are not part of a screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui States pane, click the empty slot to create a new state
 | |
|         and give it a name. For example, \c Normal.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Properties pane, deselect the \gui Visibility check box
 | |
|         or set \gui Opacity to 0 for each element that is not needed in this view.
 | |
|         If you specify the setting for the parent element, all child elements
 | |
|         inherit it and are also hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-screen-design.png "Designing screens"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Create additional states for each screen and set the visibility or
 | |
|         opacity of the elements in the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To determine which view opens when the application starts, use the code
 | |
|         editor to set the state of the root item of the .qml file, as specified by the
 | |
|         following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \qml
 | |
|         Item {
 | |
|             state: "Normal"
 | |
|         }
 | |
|         \endqml
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-screens.html
 | |
|     \page quick-animations.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-user-interaction.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Animating Screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To make movement between states smooth, you can specify transitions.
 | |
|     You can use different types of animated transitions. For example, you can animate changes
 | |
|     to property values and colors. You can use rotation animation to control the direction of
 | |
|     rotation. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativeanimation.html}{QML Animation}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \c ParallelAnimation element to start several animations at the same time.
 | |
|     Or use the \c SequentialAnimation element to run them one after another.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the code editor to specify transitions. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-transition.html}{QML Transition Element}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-animations.html
 | |
|     \page quick-user-interaction.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-export-to-qml.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Adding User Interaction Methods
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add the following basic interaction methods to scenes:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-flickable.html}{Flickable}
 | |
|         items can be flicked horizontally or vertically.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-flipable.html}{Flipable}
 | |
|         items can be flipped between their front and back sides by using rotation,
 | |
|         state, and transition.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-focusscope.html}{Focus Scope}
 | |
|         assists in keyboard focus handling when building reusable QML components.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-mousearea.html}{Mouse Area}
 | |
|         enables simple mouse handling.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-user-interaction.html
 | |
|     \page quick-export-to-qml.html
 | |
|     \nextpage quick-application-logic.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Exporting Designs from Graphics Software
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can export designs from graphics software, such as Adobe Photoshop and GIMP,
 | |
|     to QML files. Each scene is converted into a single QML file with an Image or a
 | |
|     Text element for each layer and saved on the development PC. Top-level layer
 | |
|     groups are converted into merged QML Image elements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Note: GIMP does not support grouping, and therefore, each layer is exported as
 | |
|     an item in GIMP.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following rules apply to the conversions:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Layer names are used as element names. Spaces and hash marks (#) are
 | |
|          replaced with underscore characters to create valid ids for the elements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Layer styles, such as drop shadows, are converted to images.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Offset, size, ordering and opacity are preserved.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Text layers are converted to Text elements, unless you specify that they
 | |
|         be converted to Image elements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Hidden layers can be exported, and their visibility is set to hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o PNG images are copied to the images subirectory.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can open the QML file in Qt Creator for editing. If you edit the file in Adobe
 | |
|     Photoshop and export it to the same directory again, any changes you made in Qt
 | |
|     Creator are overwritten. However, you can re-export graphical assets without
 | |
|     recreating the QML code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you create vector graphics with other tools that have an Adobe Photoshop export
 | |
|     option,such as Adobe Illustrator, you can export them first to Photoshop and then
 | |
|     to QML.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Exporting from Adobe Photoshop to QML
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-export-photoshop.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The script has been tested to work on Adobe Photoshop CS 4 and 5, but it might also
 | |
|     work on other versions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Download the export script, \e{Export QML.jx}, from
 | |
|         \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-labs/photoshop-qmlexporter/trees/master}{Gitorious}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Read the README.txt file in the repository for latest information about
 | |
|         the script.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Double-click the export script to add the export command to the \gui Scripts
 | |
|         menu. You can also copy the script file to the Adobe Photoshop scripts directory
 | |
|         (typically, \c{\Presets\Scripts} in the Photoshop installation directory).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In Adobe Photoshop, choose \gui {File > Scripts > Export to QML} to export the
 | |
|         scene to a QML file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Export Document to QML} dialog, enter a name and location for the
 | |
|         QML file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui {Rasterize text} check box to export text layers as images,
 | |
|         not as Text elements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui {Group layers} check box to export each top-level group as a
 | |
|         merged QML Image element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui {Export hidden} check box to export hidden layers and to set
 | |
|         their visibility property to hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Deselect the \gui {Export QML} check box if you have modified the QML document
 | |
|         in Qt Creator, but still want to re-export graphical assets.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Export.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The QML file is saved to the location that you specified.
 | |
|     In Qt Creator, choose \gui {File > Open File or Project} to open the QML file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Existing files are replaced without warning.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Exporting from GIMP to QML
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-export-gimp.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The script has been tested to work on GIMP 2. You can download GIMP 2 from
 | |
|     \l{http://www.gimp.org/downloads/}{GIMP Downloads}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use the export script on Microsoft Windows, you also need to install the
 | |
|     GIMP Python extension (Python, PyCairo, PyGobject, PyGTK). However, GIMP is
 | |
|     not officially supported on Windows, so we cannot guarantee that this will
 | |
|     work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o On Microsoft Windows, you must first add Python support to your GIMP
 | |
|         installation, as instructed in
 | |
|         \l {http://www.gimpusers.com/tutorials/install-python-for-gimp-2-6-windows}{Tutorial: Installing Python for GIMP 2.6 (Windows)}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Download the export script, \e qmlexporter.py, from
 | |
|         \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-labs/gimp-qmlexporter/trees/master}{Gitorious}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Read the INSTALL.txt in the repository for latest information about the
 | |
|         script.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Copy the export script to the plug-ins directory in the GIMP installation
 | |
|         directory.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Check the properties of the file to make sure that it is executable.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         On Linux, run the following command: \c {chmod u+rx}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Restart GIMP to have the export command added to the \gui File menu.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {File > Export to QML} to export the design to a QML file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Export Layers to a QML Document} dialog, enter a name and
 | |
|         location for the QML file, and click \gui Export.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The QML file is saved to the location that you specified.
 | |
|     In Qt Creator, choose \gui {File > Open File or Project} to open the QML file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Existing files are replaced without warning.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage quick-export-to-qml.html
 | |
|     \page quick-application-logic.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-using-qt-designer.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Implementing Application Logic
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A user interface is only a part of an application, and not really useful by itself.
 | |
|     You can use Qt or JavaScript to implement the application logic. For more information on
 | |
|     using JavaScript, see
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativejavascript.html} {Integrating JavaScript}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For an example of how to use JavaScript to develop a game, see the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-advtutorial.html} {QML Advanced Tutorial}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|  */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-refactoring.html
 | |
|     \page qt-quick-toolbars.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-locator.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using Qt Quick Toolbars
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you edit QML code in the code editor, you specify the properties
 | |
|     of QML components. For some properties, such as colors and font names,
 | |
|     this is not a trivial task. For example, few people can visualize the
 | |
|     color #18793f.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To easily edit these properties, you can use the Qt Quick Toolbars.
 | |
|     When you select a component in the code and a toolbar is available,
 | |
|      a light bulb icon appears:
 | |
|     \inlineimage qml-toolbar-indicator.png
 | |
|     . Select the icon to open the toolbar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open toolbars immediately when you select a component, select
 | |
|     \gui{Tools > Options... > Qt Quick > Qt Quick Toolbar > Always show Quick
 | |
|     Toolbar}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Drag the toolbar to pin it to another location. Select
 | |
|     \inlineimage qml-toolbar-pin.png
 | |
|     to unpin the toolbar and move it to its default location. To pin toolbars
 | |
|     by default, select \gui{Tools > Options... > Qt Quick > Qt Quick Toolbar
 | |
|     > Pin Quick Toolbar}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Previewing Images
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Qt Quick Toolbar for images allows you to edit the properties of
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/latest/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
 | |
|     and \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/latest/qml-image.html}{Image} components.
 | |
|     You can scale and tile the images, replace them with other images,
 | |
|     preview them, and change the image margins.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-toolbar-image.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for images"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To preview an image, double-click it on the toolbar. In the preview
 | |
|     dialog, you can zoom the image. Drag the image margins to change them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-toolbar-image-preview.png "Image preview dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Formatting Text
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Qt Quick Toolbar for text allows you to edit the properties of
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/latest/qml-text.html}{Text} components.
 | |
|     You can change the font family and size as well as text formatting, style,
 | |
|     alignment, and color.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If a property is assigned an expression instead of a value, you
 | |
|     cannot use the toolbar to edit it. The button for editing the property
 | |
|     is disabled.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-toolbar-text.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for text"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, font size is specified as pixels. To use points, instead,
 | |
|     change \gui px to \gui pt in the size field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Previewing Animation
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Qt Quick Toolbar for animation allows you to edit the properties of
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-propertyanimation.html}{PropertyAnimation}
 | |
|     components and the components that inherit it. You can change the easing curve
 | |
|     type and duration. For some curves, you can also specify amplitude, period,
 | |
|     and overshoot values.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-toolbar-animation.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for animation"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select the play button to preview your changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Editing Rectangles
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Qt Quick Toolbar for rectangles allows you to edit the properties of
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-rectangle.html}{Rectangle}
 | |
|     components. You can change the fill and border colors and add
 | |
|     gradients.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qml-toolbar-rectangle.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for rectangles"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add gradient stop points, click above the gradient bar. To remove
 | |
|     stop points, drag them upwards.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging-qml.html
 | |
|     \page creator-maemo-emulator.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-deployment.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using the Maemo Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo 5 emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
 | |
|     applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
 | |
|     on a Nokia N900 device with software update release 1.3 (V20.2010.36-2).
 | |
|     You can test user interaction by using the keypad and
 | |
|     touch emulation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To test the application UI, user interaction with the application, and
 | |
|     functionality that uses the mobility APIs, use the Qt Simulator,
 | |
|     instead. For more information, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qtsimulator/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo 5 emulator is installed and configured as part of the \QSDK
 | |
|     package. You can also install and configure the MADDE environment and
 | |
|     Maemo emulator separately. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting the Maemo Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Start Maemo Emulator} button is visible if you have a project
 | |
|     open in Qt Creator for which you have added the Maemo build target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To start the Maemo emulator, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-maemo-emulator-button.png "Start Maemo Emulator button"
 | |
|     .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Test your application on the Maemo emulator as on a device. For a list of
 | |
|     keyboard shortcuts that you can use to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions, see
 | |
|     \l {Emulating Nokia N900 Keys}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Rendering Graphics
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo emulator supports OpenGL to improve graphics rendering. Hardware
 | |
|     acceleration produces better results than software rendering. By default,
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically detects, whether hardware acceleration is
 | |
|     supported on the development PC and tries to use it. However, sometimes
 | |
|     the results of the automatic detection are not reliable, and
 | |
|     hardware acceleration might be selected even if it is actually not
 | |
|     available on the development PC. This causes the emulator to crash.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If the Maemo emulator crashes, you are asked whether you want to try
 | |
|     software rendering, instead.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To specify the OpenGL mode, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Maemo > Qemu
 | |
|     Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Emulating Nokia N900 Keys
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts that you can use
 | |
|     to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Nokia N900 Key
 | |
|             \o Keyboard Shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o \list
 | |
|                 \o Alphabet keys
 | |
|                 \o Comma (,)
 | |
|                 \o Period (.)
 | |
|                 \o Space
 | |
|                 \o Arrow keys
 | |
|                 \o Enter
 | |
|                 \o Backspace
 | |
|                \endlist
 | |
|             \o Respective keys on the development PC keyboard.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Shift
 | |
|             \o Left Shift key
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Ctrl
 | |
|             \o Left Ctrl key
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Mode
 | |
|             \o Left Alt key
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Power
 | |
|             \o Esc
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Keypad slider open and close
 | |
|             \o F1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Keypad lock
 | |
|             \o F2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Camera lens open and close
 | |
|             \o F3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Camera focus
 | |
|             \o F4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Camera take picture
 | |
|             \o F5
 | |
|             \note The actual camera functionality is not emulated.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Stereo headphones connect and disconnect
 | |
|             \o F6
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Volume down
 | |
|             \o F7
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Volume up
 | |
|             \o F8
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer x axis, negative
 | |
|             \o 1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer x axis, positive
 | |
|             \o 2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer z axis, negative
 | |
|             \o 4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer z axis, positive
 | |
|             \o 5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer y axis, negative
 | |
|             \o 7
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer y axis, positive
 | |
|             \o 8
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-using-qt-designer.html
 | |
|     \page adding-plugins.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-usability.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Adding Qt Designer Plugins
 | |
| 
 | |
|      You can use Qt APIs to create plugins that extend Qt applications.
 | |
|      This allows you to add your own widgets to \QD.
 | |
|      The most flexible way to include a plugin with an application is to compile it
 | |
|      into a dynamic library that is shipped separately, and detected and loaded at runtime.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The applications can detect plugins that are stored in the standard plugin
 | |
|      subdirectories. For more information on how to create and locate plugins and to
 | |
|      change the default plugin path, see \l{How to Create Qt Plugins}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      For more information about how to create plugins for \QD, see
 | |
|      \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/designer-using-custom-widgets.html}{Creating and Using Components for Qt Designer}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Locating Qt Designer Plugins
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \QD fetches plugins from the standard locations and loads the plugins
 | |
|      that match its build key. \QD is delivered both as a standalone application
 | |
|      and as part of the SDK, where it is integrated into Qt Creator.
 | |
|      The correct folder to place the plugins depends on
 | |
|      which one you use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The integrated \QD fetches plugins from the \c {%SDK%\bin\designer} folder on Windows
 | |
|      and Linux. For information about how to configure plugins on Mac OS, see
 | |
|      \l{Configuring Qt Designer Plugins on Mac OS}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      To check which plugins
 | |
|      were loaded successfully and which failed, choose \gui{Tools > Form Editor >
 | |
|      About Qt Designer Plugins}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The standalone \QD is part of the Qt library used for building projects,
 | |
|      located under \c {%SDK%\qt}. Therefore, it fetches plugins from the following folder:
 | |
|      \c {%SDK%\qt\plugins\designer}. To check which plugins were loaded successfully and which
 | |
|      failed, choose \gui{Help > About Plugins}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \section2 Configuring Qt Designer Plugins on Mac OS
 | |
| 
 | |
|      On the Mac, a GUI application must be built and run from a bundle. A bundle is a
 | |
|      directory structure that appears as a single entity when viewed in the Finder.
 | |
|      A bundle for an application typcially contains the executable and all the resources
 | |
|      it needs.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      Qt Creator uses its own set of Qt Libraries located in the bundle, and therefore,
 | |
|      you need to configure the \QD plugins that you want to use with Qt Creator.
 | |
|      Fore more information about how to deploy applications on Mac OS, see
 | |
|      \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/deployment-mac.html}{Deploying an Application on Mac OS X}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The following example illustrates how to configure version 5.2.1 of the
 | |
|      \l{http://qwt.sourceforge.net/}{Qwt - Qt Widgets for Technical Applications} library
 | |
|      for use with Qt Creator:
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o To check the paths used in the Qwt library, enter the following \c otool command:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 0
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The output for Qwt 5.2.1 indicates that the plugin uses Qt core libraries (QtDesigner,
 | |
|     QtScript, QtXml, QtGui and QtCore) and libqwt.5.dylib:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 1
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \o You must copy the \QD plugin and the Qwt library files to the following locations:
 | |
| 
 | |
|                  \list
 | |
|                  \o \c {libqwt_designer_plugin.dylib} to \c {QtCreator.app/Contents/MacOS/designer}
 | |
|                  \o \c {libqwt.*.dylib} to \c {QtCreator.app/Contents/Frameworks}
 | |
|                  \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Enter the following commands:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 4
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Enter the following \c otool command to check the libraries that are used by the
 | |
|     Qwt library:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 2
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The command returns the following output:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 3
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Enter the following \c install_name_tool command to fix the references of the
 | |
|     libraries:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 5
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \section1 Matching Build Keys
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The Qt Creator that is included in pre-built SDK packages on Windows is built with the
 | |
|      Microsoft Visual Studio compiler, whereas the version of Qt shipped for building applications
 | |
|      is configured and built to use the MinGW/g++ compiler. Plugins built by using this version of
 | |
|      Qt cannot be loaded by Qt Creator because the build-keys do not match. The plugins can only be
 | |
|      used in the standalone version of \QD. Choose \gui{Help > About Qt Creator} to check
 | |
|      the Qt version Qt Creator was built with.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      To use \QD plugins that were built for the shipped Qt version, make sure that
 | |
|      Qt Creator is built with the same compiler by either recompiling Qt Creator using MinGW or
 | |
|      recompiling Qt with Microsoft Visual Studio, depending on which configuration you want to
 | |
|      use for your applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage adding-plugins.html
 | |
|     \page creator-usability.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-building-running.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Before starting application development, analyze and define the requirements, scope, and
 | |
|     functionality of the application to ensure efficient functionality and a smooth user
 | |
|     experience. Design the application for a single purpose and analyze how it can best serve
 | |
|     its users. Mobile devices have been designed for use when mobile. Keep the characteristics
 | |
|     of mobile devices in mind when you create applications for them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following guidelines help you design and develop usable applications for mobile devices
 | |
|     with varying characteristics, such as screen size and support for input methods:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Know your users
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Find out who will use the application, what they will use it for,
 | |
|         and which mobile devices they have. Then design the application to fit a specific context
 | |
|         of use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Design for small screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The screen size of mobile devices is significantly smaller
 | |
|         than that available on desktop devices. Carefully consider what is the most relevant
 | |
|         content to present on the application UI, as it might not be reasonable to try and fit as
 | |
|         much content into the screen as you might have in a desktop application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design for multiple screen sizes
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Relate the position and size of each control to the
 | |
|        dimensions of the display. This enables the same set of information to be presented on the
 | |
|        screen in all resolutions; higher resolution devices just display finer graphics.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design for changing screen orientation
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Some devices support screen rotation. On these
 | |
|        devices, applications can be displayed in portrait or landscape orientation. Account for
 | |
|        orientation and dynamically adjust the display when the screen is rotated.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design intuitive ways of moving within applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Mobile devices lack a mouse and
 | |
|        full-size keyboard, so users must use the touch screen or five way navigation pad to move within
 | |
|        applications. In addition, many users control the devices with one hand. To create an optimized user
 | |
|        experience, allow users to access information with one click; do not make them scroll and type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design for limited input methods
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Applications collect information from users on the task
 | |
|        at hand. In addition to touch screen input, some devices contain physical keys such
 | |
|        as a five way navigation pad, a keypad, and a keyboard. Users enter information by using screen
 | |
|        controls, such as lists, check boxes, radio buttons, and text fields.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Keep response times short
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Latency can cause delays in user interaction. If users perceive
 | |
|        an application as being slow, they are likely to get frustrated and stop using it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Save battery time
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Mobile devices are not constantly connected to a power source but run on
 | |
|        battery power. Optimize power consumption to keep the total consumption at an acceptable
 | |
|        level and to prevent users from running out of battery time.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Consider network issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|        If users do not have a flat-rate data plan or WLAN support, mobile
 | |
|        network connections cost them money. Also, when users move around with the devices, the networks
 | |
|        available for connections constantly change.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Remember the processing limits of the device
 | |
| 
 | |
|        The memory available on devices is limited
 | |
|        and you should use it carefully. Although all mobile devices have common functionality,
 | |
|        each device is individual in terms of both the resources available and extra features.
 | |
|        Therefore, you must consider the constraints of all the target devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|        For more information about user experience techniques for mobile devices, see the
 | |
|        \l{http://library.forum.nokia.com/topic/Design_and_User_Experience_Library/GUID-A8DF3EB8-E97C-4DA0-95F6-F464ECC995BC_cover.html}{Design and User Experience Library}
 | |
|        on Forum Nokia.
 | |
| 
 | |
|  */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-help.html
 | |
|     \page creator-tips.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Tips and Tricks
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Switching Between Modes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator uses different modes for different purposes. You can quickly
 | |
|     switch between these modes with the following keyboard shortcuts:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui Welcome mode \key Ctrl+1
 | |
|         \o \gui Edit mode \key Ctrl+2
 | |
|         \o \gui Design mode \key Ctrl+3
 | |
|         \o \gui Debug mode \key Ctrl+4
 | |
|         \o \gui Projects mode \key Ctrl+5
 | |
|         \o \gui Help mode \key Ctrl+6
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about Qt Creator modes, see \l {Qt Creator Modes}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving Between Open Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To quickly move between currently open files, press
 | |
|     \key Ctrl+Tab.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To move forward in the location history, press \key {Alt+Right}
 | |
|     (\key {Cmd+Opt+Right} on Mac OS). To move backward, press \key {Alt+Left}
 | |
|     (\key {Cmd+Opt+Left} on Mac OS). For example, if you use the \gui Locator
 | |
|     to jump to a symbol in the same file, you can jump back to your original
 | |
|     location in that file by pressing \key {Alt+Left}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving To the Edit Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To move to the \gui Edit mode and currently active file, press
 | |
|     \key Esc.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you already are in the \gui Edit mode:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o The first press moves focus to the editor
 | |
|         \o The second press closes secondary windows
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using the Filter in Options Dialog
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To find specific settings you require in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...}
 | |
|     use the filter located at the top left of the \gui Options dialog box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Opening Output Panes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The output panes provide a list of errors and warnings encountered during
 | |
|     a build, detailed output from the compiler, status of a program when it is
 | |
|     executed and debug output, as well as search results.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open output panes, use the following shortcuts:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{Build Issues} pane Alt+1 (Cmd+1 on Mac OS X)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{Search Results} pane Alt+2 (Cmd+2 on Mac OS X)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{Application Output} pane Alt+3 (Cmd+3 on Mac OS X)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{Compile Output} pane Alt+4 (Cmd+4 on Mac OS X)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about output panes, see \l{Viewing Output}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}{many useful keyboard shortcuts}.
 | |
|     You can see the keyboard shortcut for a menu command in the menu
 | |
|     or the tooltip for a button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To customize, import or export keyboard shortcuts, select \gui Tools >
 | |
|     \gui Options... > \gui Environment > \gui Keyboard.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running Qt Creator From Command Line
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can launch Qt Creator from command line using the name of an
 | |
|     existing session or \c .pro file by giving the name as the command
 | |
|     argument.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, running \tt{qtcreator somesession}, launches Qt Creator and
 | |
|     loads session somesession.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Make sure Qt Creator is included in the PATH environment variable.
 | |
|     This can be done by typing the following in the command line:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     set PATH=c:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;c:\qtsdk\qt\bin;%PATH%
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Showing and Hiding the Sidebar
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To toggle the sidebar in the \gui Edit and \gui Debug modes, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
 | |
|     or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on using the sidebar, see \l {Browsing Project Contents}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving To Symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To move straight to a symbol used in a project, select the symbol in the
 | |
|     \gui Editor toolbar drop-down menu. For more information on the editor toolbar,
 | |
|     see \l {Using the Editor Toolbar}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To jump to a symbol in the current file, press \key {Ctrl+K} to open the
 | |
|     \gui Locator, enter a period (.), and start typing the symbol name. Then
 | |
|     select the symbol in the list. For more information on using the locator,
 | |
|     see \l{Searching With the Locator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Press \key Ctrl (\key Cmd on Mac OS) and click a symbol to move directly to
 | |
|     the definition or the declaration of the symbol. You can also move the cursor
 | |
|     on the symbol and press \key {F2}. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Moving to Symbol Definition or Declaration}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Displaying Signals and Slots
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If an instance of a class is derived from QObject, and you would like to
 | |
|     find all other objects connected to one of your object's slots using
 | |
|     Qt's signals and slots mechanism, select \gui Tools > \gui Options...
 | |
|     > \gui{Debugger} > \gui{Debugging Helper} > \gui{Use Debugging Helper}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, expand the object's entry and open
 | |
|     the slot in the \e slots subitem. The objects connected to this slot are
 | |
|     shown as children of the slot. This method works with signals too.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, see
 | |
|     \l{Locals and Watchers}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Displaying Low Level Data
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If special debugging of Qt objects fails due to data corruption within the
 | |
|     debugged objects, you can switch off the debugging helpers. When debugging
 | |
|     helpers are switched off low-level structures become visible.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To switch off the debugging helpers:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Debugger >
 | |
|            \gui{Debugging Helper}.
 | |
|         \o Uncheck the \gui{Use Debugging Helper} checkbox.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Showing Tooltips in Debug Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To inspect the value of variables from the editor, you can turn
 | |
|     on tooltips. Tooltips are hidden by default for performance reasons.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Debugger > \gui General.
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui {Use tooltips in main editor while debugging} check box.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Locating Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Locator provides one of the easiest ways in Qt Creator to browse
 | |
|     through projects, files, classes, methods, documentation and file systems.
 | |
|     To quickly access files not directly mentioned in your project, you can
 | |
|     create your own locator filters. That way you can locate files in a
 | |
|     directory structure you have defined.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create locator filters, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Locator > Add}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Creating Locator Filters}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding a License Header Template for C++ Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A file containing a license header for C++ can be specified under
 | |
|     \gui{Tools > Options... > C++ > License Template}. It may contain special
 | |
|     placeholders enclosed in \c{%%} that are replaced when generating a
 | |
|     new file:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o \c %YEAR%: Year
 | |
|         \o \c %MONTH%: Month
 | |
|         \o \c %DAY%: Day of the month
 | |
|         \o \c %DATE%: Date
 | |
|         \o \c %USER%: User name
 | |
|         \o \c %FILENAME%: File name
 | |
|         \o \c %CLASS%: Class name (if applicable)
 | |
|         \o \c %$VARIABLE%: Contents of environment variable \c{VARIABLE}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-tips.html
 | |
|     \page creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-known-issues.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides various keyboard shortcuts to speed up your development
 | |
|     process.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To customize a keyboard shortcut:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Environment >
 | |
|            \gui Keyboard.
 | |
|         \o Select an action from the list.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{Key Sequence} enter the shortcut key you want to associate
 | |
|            with the selected action.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to use different keyboard shortcut mapping schemes:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To import a keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click \gui Import
 | |
|            and select the kms file containing keyboard shortcut mapping scheme
 | |
|            you want to import.
 | |
|         \o To export the current keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click
 | |
|            \gui Export and select the location where you want to save the
 | |
|            exported kms file.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Default Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following tables list the default keyboard shortcuts. They are
 | |
|     categorized by actions.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 General Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Open file or project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+O
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o New file or project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+N
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Open in external editor
 | |
|             \o Alt+V, Alt+I
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Cut
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+X
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Copy
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+C
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Paste
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+V
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Redo
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Y
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Save
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+S
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Save all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+A
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Close window
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+W
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Close all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+W
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go back
 | |
|             \o Alt+Left
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go forward
 | |
|             \o Alt+Right
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to line
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+L
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Next open document in history
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+Tab
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Goto other split
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, O
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Previous open document in history
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Tab
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui Locator
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+K
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Welcome mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Edit mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Design mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Debug mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Projects mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+6
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Build Issues} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+1 (Cmd+1 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Search Results} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+2 (Cmd+2 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Application Output} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+3 (Cmd+3 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Compile Output} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+4 (Cmd+4 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui Bookmarks pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+M
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui{File System} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+Y
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui{Open Documents} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+O
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui Projects pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+X
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Full screen
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+F11
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle the sidebar
 | |
|             \o Alt+0 (Cmd+0 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Undo
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Z
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Move to \gui Edit mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|                In \gui Edit mode:
 | |
|                \list
 | |
|                 \o The first press moves focus to the editor
 | |
|                 \o The second press closes secondary windows
 | |
|                \endlist
 | |
|             \o Esc
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Auto-indent selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+I
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Collapse
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+<
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Expand
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+>
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Trigger a completion in this scope
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Space
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Copy line down
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Alt+Down
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Copy line up
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Alt+Up
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Cut line
 | |
|             \o Shift+Del
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Join lines
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+J
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Decrease font size
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+- (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel down)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Increase font size
 | |
|             \o Ctrl++ (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel up)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle Vim-style editing
 | |
|             \o Alt+V, Alt+V
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Split
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Split side by side
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Remove all splits
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Remove current split
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 0
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Select all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+A
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block end
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+]
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block start
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+[
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block end with selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+}
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block start with selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+{
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Move current line down
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+Down
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Move current line up
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+Up
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Trigger a quick fix in this scope
 | |
|             \o Alt+Return
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Rewrap paragraph
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, R
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Select the current block
 | |
| 
 | |
|                The second press extends the selection to the parent block
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+U
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Enable text wrapping
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+W
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle comment for selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+/
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Visualize whitespace
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+V
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Delete
 | |
|             \o Del
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Adjust size
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+J
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Lay out in a grid
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+G
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Lay out horizontally
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+H
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Lay out vertically
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+L
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Preview
 | |
|             \o Alt+Shift+R
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Edit signals and slots
 | |
|             \o F4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Edit widgets
 | |
|             \o F3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle bookmark
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+M
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to next bookmark
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to previous bookmark
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+,
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Fetch snippet
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+F
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Paste snippet
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+P
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Find usages
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+U
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Follow symbol under cursor
 | |
| 
 | |
|                Works with namespaces, classes, methods, variables, include
 | |
|                statements and macros
 | |
|             \o F2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Rename symbol under cursor
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+R
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch between method declaration and definition
 | |
|             \o Shift+F2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Open type hierarchy
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+T
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch between header and source file
 | |
|             \o F4
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Debugging Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Start debugging
 | |
|             \o F5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Stop or interrupt debugger
 | |
|             \o Shift+F5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Reset debugger
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+F5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Step over
 | |
|             \o F10
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Step into
 | |
|             \o F11
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Step out
 | |
|             \o Shift+F11
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle breakpoint
 | |
|             \o F9
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Project Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Build project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+B
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Build all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+B
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o New project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+N
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Run
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+R
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Help Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o View context-sensitive help
 | |
|             \o F1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate contents in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+T
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Add bookmark in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+M
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate index in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+I
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Reset font size in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+0
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate search in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+S
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Version Control Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o {1,2} Action
 | |
|             \o {5,1} Version control system
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o CVS
 | |
|             \o Git
 | |
|             \o Perforce
 | |
|             \o Subversion
 | |
|             \o Mercurial
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Add
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+A
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+A
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+S, Alt+A
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Commit
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+C
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+C
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+C
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Diff
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+S, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+D
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Diff project
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Blame
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+B
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Log
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+L
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+F
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+L
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Log project
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+K
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Status
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+S
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+S
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Undo changes
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+U
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Diff project
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Edit
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+E
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Opened
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+O
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Revert
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+R
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Submit
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+S
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-known-issues.html
 | |
|     \page creator-glossary.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-acknowledgements.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Glossary
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o  Term
 | |
|             \o  Meaning
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|                 \raw HTML
 | |
|                 Qt in PATH
 | |
|                 \endraw
 | |
|                 \target glossary-system-qt
 | |
|             \o  This is the Qt
 | |
|                 version for the \c qmake command found in your \c PATH
 | |
|                 environment variable.
 | |
|                 This is likely to be the system's Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|                 \raw HTML
 | |
|                 Project Qt
 | |
|                 \endraw
 | |
|                 \target glossary-project-qt
 | |
|             \o  The version of Qt configured in the \gui{Projects} mode, \gui {Build
 | |
|                 Settings}, \gui {Qt Version} field. This is the Qt version that
 | |
|                 is actually used by a particular project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|                 \raw HTML
 | |
|                 Shadow build
 | |
|                 \endraw
 | |
|                 \target glossary-shadow-build
 | |
|             \o  Shadow building means building a project in a separate
 | |
|                 directory, the \e{build directory}. The build directory is
 | |
|                 different from the source directory. One of the benefits of
 | |
|                 shadow building is that it keeps your source directory clean.
 | |
|                 Shadow building is the best practice if you need many build
 | |
|                 configurations for a single set of source.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
 | |
|     \page creator-known-issues.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-glossary.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Known Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section lists known issues in Qt Creator version 2.1.0.
 | |
|     The development team is aware of them, and therefore, you do not need to
 | |
|     report them as bugs.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For a list of fixed issues and added features, see the changelog file in
 | |
|     the \c{qtcreator\dist} folder or the \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com}{Qt Bug Tracker}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 General Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Qt Creator uses SQLite for storing some of its settings. SQLite is
 | |
|            known to have problems with certain NFS servers (most notably the
 | |
|            nfs-user-server 2.2beta), since they can lock up the application
 | |
|            when it tries to lock the database. If your home directory is on an
 | |
|            NFS share and you encounter this issue, one option would be to
 | |
|            switch to the nfs-kernel-server, or create a symlink so that the
 | |
|            settings are stored locally.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Editing Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Code completion does not support typedefs for nested classes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Projects Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Paths or file names containing spaces or special characters
 | |
|            (such as colons, dollar signs, and hash marks) may cause problems. This
 | |
|            is because some of the tools Qt Creator uses in the background have
 | |
|            restrictions on the characters allowed in file and directory names.
 | |
|            To be on the safe side, we recommend creating projects and project
 | |
|            items with names consisting of plain characters, numbers,
 | |
|            underscores, and hyphens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Creating new CMake projects with Qt Creator is not supported.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Building and packaging subprojects is not supported for Maemo devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o You must create projects for Maemo targets on the same partition where
 | |
|         you installed \QSDK, Qt Creator, and MADDE.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If error messages displayed in the \gui {Compile Output} pane contain
 | |
|         paths where slashes are missing (for example, C:QtSDK),
 | |
|         check your PATH variable. For more information, see
 | |
|         \l{Troubleshooting MinGW Compilation Errors}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Debugging large applications on Symbian devices using the Symbian S^3
 | |
|            operating system might not work, because the TRK debug agent might not be able to
 | |
|            access memory when the operating system starts paging. This causes breakpoint
 | |
|            handling and symbol resolution to fail. For more information, see
 | |
|            \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTCREATORBUG-2158}{QTCREATORBUG-2158}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            As a workaround, add the following section to the application .pro file to
 | |
|            disable paging:
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \code
 | |
|            debug {
 | |
|                MMP_RULES -= PAGED
 | |
|                MMP_RULES *= UNPAGED
 | |
|            }
 | |
|            \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note You must completely clean and rebuild the project for the setting to
 | |
|            take effect.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o When debugging executables created by the GNU Compiler version 4.5.0
 | |
|            (all platforms), some data types will not be displayed in the
 | |
|            \gui{Locals and Watchers} view due to missing debug information.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Gdb on Windows may not work if the 'Embassy \reg Security Center' software
 | |
|            by 'Wave \reg Systems' is installed and active (causing crashes in \c{vxvault.dll)}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Gdb may take long to load debugging symbols, especially from large
 | |
|            libraries like \c libQtWebKit. Starting the debugging module can
 | |
|            take up to several minutes without visible progress.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Setting breakpoints in code that is compiled into the binary more
 | |
|            than once does not work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Setting breakpoints in files that do not have unique absolute
 | |
|            paths may fail. For example, remounting parts of a file system
 | |
|            using the --bind mount option.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-glossary.html
 | |
|     \page creator-acknowledgements.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Acknowledgements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Third-party Components
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator contains the following third-party components:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|     \o  \bold{Open Source front-end for C++ (license MIT)}, enhanced for use in
 | |
|         Qt Creator.\br
 | |
|         Roberto Raggi <roberto.raggi@gmail.com>\br
 | |
|         QtCreator/src/shared/cplusplus\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o  \bold{Botan, a C++ crypto library. Version 1.8.8}\br
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o  Copyright (C) 1999-2004 The Botan Project. All rights reserved.
 | |
|         \o  Copyright (C) 1999-2009 Jack Lloyd
 | |
|         \o  2001 Peter J Jones
 | |
|         \o  2004-2007 Justin Karneges
 | |
|         \o  2005 Matthew Gregan
 | |
|         \o  2005-2006 Matt Johnston
 | |
|         \o  2006 Luca Piccarreta
 | |
|         \o  2007 Yves Jerschow
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 FlexSecure GmbH
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 Technische Universitat Darmstadt
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 Falko Strenzke
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 Martin Doering
 | |
|         \o  2007 Manuel Hartl
 | |
|         \o  2007 Christoph Ludwig
 | |
|         \o  2007 Patrick Sona
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|         All rights reserved.\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 | |
|         modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
 | |
|         met:\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
 | |
|         notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
 | |
|         notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
 | |
|         documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.\br
 | |
|         \br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 | |
|         IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 | |
|         WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
 | |
|         ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) OR CONTRIBUTOR(S) BE
 | |
|         LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 | |
|         CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 | |
|         SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
 | |
|         BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
 | |
|         WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 | |
|         OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
 | |
|         IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.\br\br
 | |
|         The source code of Botan C++ crypto library can be found
 | |
|         here:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
 | |
|         \o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|         \br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o  \bold{NetSieben SSH Library is a Secure Shell client library for C++.
 | |
|          Version 1.3.2}\br
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o \bold{Commercial License:} For organizations who do not want to
 | |
|             release the source code for their applications as open source/
 | |
|             free software; in other words they do not want to comply with the
 | |
|             GNU General Public License (GPL) or Q Public License.
 | |
|         \o \bold{Non Commercial / Open Source License:} NetSieben believes in
 | |
|             contributing back to the open source community, thus it has released
 | |
|             the SSH Library under Q Public License as it is defined by Trolltech
 | |
|             AS of Norway. The Open Source License allows the user to use software
 | |
|             under an open source / free software license, and distribute it
 | |
|             freely. The software can be used at no charge with the condition
 | |
|             that if the user uses the SSH Library in an application they wish to
 | |
|             redistribute, then the complete source code for your application must
 | |
|             be available and freely redistributable under reasonable conditions.
 | |
|             For more information on the used QPL License see:
 | |
|             QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty/net7ssh/LICENSE.QPL
 | |
|         \endlist\br\br
 | |
|         The source code of NetSieben Secure Shell C++ Library can be found
 | |
|         here:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
 | |
|         \o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-version-control.html
 | |
|     \page creator-task-lists.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-cli.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating Task List Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can load tasks from task lists to the \gui{Build Issues} pane. You can
 | |
|     either create the task lists manually or create scripts to generate them from
 | |
|     output of static code analysis tools, for example.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For an example of a script that checks new lines of code and matches them
 | |
|     against regular expressions to generate a task list, see \c{scripts\mytasks.pl}
 | |
|     in the Qt Creator repository.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Task List File Format
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The filename extension must be .tasks for Qt Creator to recognize a file as a
 | |
|     task list file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Each line in a task list file is treated as a tab-separated list of strings with
 | |
|     \c{\t}, \c{\n}, and \c{\\} used as escape characters. The strings are used to create
 | |
|     one task per line. The lines can have one of the following formats:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c description
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c{type\tdescription}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c{file\ttype\tdescription}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \c{file\tline\ttype\tdescription}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The task type can have one of the following values:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o A string starting with \c err, which displays the error icon in the beginning of the line
 | |
|     \o A string starting with \c warn, which displays the warning icon
 | |
|     \o Any other value, which sets the task type to Unknown and does not
 | |
|     display an icon
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The values are not case sensitive.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Lines starting with the hash mark character (#) in the first column are ignored.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-task-lists.html
 | |
|     \page creator-cli.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-help.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using Command Line Options
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can start Qt Creator and specify some options from the command line.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To specify command line options, enter the following command in the Qt Creator
 | |
|     installation or build directory:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \c {qtcreator [option] [filename]}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \c {C:\qtcreator-2.1\bin>qtcreator -help}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes the available options:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Option
 | |
|             \o Description
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -help
 | |
|             \o Display help on command line options.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -version
 | |
|             \o Display Qt Creator version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -client
 | |
|             \o Attempt to connect to an already running instance of Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -noload <plugin>
 | |
|             \o Do not load the specified plugin.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -profile
 | |
|             \o Output plugin start up and shut down profiling data.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -settingspath <path>
 | |
|             \o Override the default path where user settings are stored.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -color <color>
 | |
|             \o Core plugin: override the selected UI color.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -disable-cdb
 | |
|             \o Debugger plugin: disable the Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB)
 | |
|             engine. For more information, see \l{Debugging}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -disable-gdb
 | |
|             \o Debugger plugin: disable the GNU Symbolic Debugger (gdb) engine.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -disable-sdb
 | |
|             \o Debugger plugin: disable the Qt Script debugger engine.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -debug <PID-or-corefile>
 | |
|             \o Debugger plugin: attach to process ID or core file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -wincrashevent <event-handle>
 | |
|             \o Debugger plugin: Attach to crashed processes by using the specified
 | |
|             event handle.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -customwizard-verbose
 | |
|             \o ProjectExplorer plugin: display additional information when loading
 | |
|             custom wizards. For more information about custom wizards, see
 | |
|             \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o -lastsession
 | |
|             \o ProjectExplorer plugin: load the last session when Qt Creator starts.
 | |
|             Open the projects and files that were open when you last exited Qt Creator.
 | |
|             For more information about managing sessions, see \l{Managing Sessions}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     */
 |